HomeMy WebLinkAbout26-0000-Electrical-(FSB)_Rev_1Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - i
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL
(Filed Sub-Bid Required)
GENERAL PROVISIONS – FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED .............................................................. 1
RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................ 1
REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS ..................................................................................... 1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................. 2
DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 3
ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED ONLY ................................................................................................. 4
ITEMS TO BE INSTALLED ONLY ................................................................................................... 4
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE................................................................................. 4
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 4
CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN ................................................................................................. 5
INSPECTION OF SITE .................................................................................................................... 5
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE ........................................................................................... 5
COOPERATION ............................................................................................................................... 5
CODES, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS ........................................................................................ 5
ELECTRICAL ROOMS OR SPACES .............................................................................................. 6
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 6
GUARANTEE ................................................................................................................................... 6
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................ 6
TEMPORARY LIGHT & POWER ..................................................................................................... 7
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SUPPORT FACILITIES .................................................................... 7
INSPECTIONS AND TESTS ........................................................................................................... 7
ENERGY REBATE PROGRAM ....................................................................................................... 7
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM (I.T.S.) and SECURITY SYSTEM PROVISIONS ........ 7
RECORD DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 8
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................. 8
STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING ...................................................................................................... 8
RETURN AIR PLENUM ................................................................................................................... 8
CUTTING AND PATCHING ............................................................................................................. 8
COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................................................... 9
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN.................................................................................................................. 9
LEED v4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 11
TRADE RESPONSIBILITY COORDINATION MATRIX ................................................................ 11
ALTERNATES ................................................................................................................................ 14
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 14
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................................ 14
CONDUCTORS ............................................................................................................................. 16
ACCESS PANELS ......................................................................................................................... 20
SLEEVES, INSERTS, AND OPENINGS ....................................................................................... 20
FLOOR OUTLETS (FLUSH TYPE) ............................................................................................... 20
WIRING DEVICES ......................................................................................................................... 27
LIGHTING FIXTURES ................................................................................................................... 30
ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 35
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS ........................................................ 36
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - ii
GROUNDING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 37
MAIN BUILDING SWITCHBOARD ................................................................................................ 38
PANELBOARDS ............................................................................................................................ 39
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS ...................................................................................................... 41
ELECTRIC SERVICE ..................................................................................................................... 42
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM WITH MASS NOTIFICATION ................................... 43
ELECTRICITY MUTLI-METERING ................................................................................................ 60
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES ................................................................................................. 61
LEVEL 2 AC DUAL ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING EQUIPMENT (EVSE) ............................. 65
AUTOMATED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................................................ 68
LADDER TRAY/WIREWAYS ......................................................................................................... 85
SEALS ............................................................................................................................................ 86
UNDERGROUND DUCTBANKS ................................................................................................... 86
STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 88
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ........................................................................................ 97
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 106
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................. 107
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ............................................................................................. 108
STAGE LIGHTING AND DIMMING SYSTEM ............................................................................. 111
RADIO REPEATER ..................................................................................................................... 120
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE ............................................................................................. 121
WORK COORDINATION AND JOB OPERATIONS ................................................................... 121
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................. 121
IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................................... 122
PROTECTION AND CLEANUP ................................................................................................... 126
PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS ..................................................................................... 127
MOUNTING HEIGHTS ................................................................................................................. 127
WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS ................................................................... 127
FEEDER CIRCUITS ..................................................................................................................... 133
BRANCH CIRCUITS .................................................................................................................... 134
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS: ................................................................................................................ 134
WATERPROOFING ..................................................................................................................... 134
CUTTING AND PATCHING ......................................................................................................... 134
ELEVATOR COORDINATION ..................................................................................................... 135
MECHANICAL SYSTEM COORDINATION................................................................................. 135
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT TESTING ..................................................................................... 135
ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS / SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY .................... 138
STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 144
WASTE MANAGEMENT.............................................................................................................. 144
TRAINING .................................................................................................................................... 144
SPARE PARTS/ATTIC STOCK: .................................................................................................. 145
END OF INDEX
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 1 of 145
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL
(Filed Sub-Bid Required)
GENERAL
GENERAL PROVISIONS – FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED
A. Work of this Section requires Filed Sub-Bids and is governed by the provisions of the
Massachusetts General Laws (MGL), Public Bidding Law Chapter 149, Sections 44A to 44J
inclusive; and applicable Section of the MGL, Public Contract Law Chapter 30 as amended.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Time, Manner and Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be submitted
electronically at a time and place as stipulated in the “Instructions to Bidders.”
2. Sub-bidders must be DCAMM Certified in the listed trade and shall include a current
DCAMM sub-bidder Certificate of Eligibility and Update Statement with the bid.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by Bid Bond, Cash,
Certified Check, Treasurer’s Check, or Cashier’s Check issued by a responsible bank or
trust company payable to the Town of Yarmouth in the amount of 5 percent of the sub-bid.
A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rejected.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 2 of 145
B. Sub Sub-Bid Requirements:
CLASS OF WORK REFERENCED SECTION
Stage Lighting 26 0953
Technology 27 0000, 27 0800
Integrated Audiovisual Systems 27 4116
Emergency Responder Radio Signal Amplification 27 5319
System (BDA System)
Electronic Access Control System 28 0000, 28 1000, 28 0800, 28 4000
Intrusion Detection System 28 0000, 28 110028 0800, 28 4000
Intercom And Emergency Phone Systems 28 0000, 28 1200, 28 0800, 28 4000
Electronic Video Management Systems 28 0000, 28 2000, 28 0800, 28 4000
The following drawings are listed for coordination with this section: E-0.01, E-0.02, E-0.03, E-
0.04, E-0.05, E-1.11A, E-1.11B, E-1.11C, E-1.11D, E-1.12A, E-1.12B, E-1.12C, E-1.12D, E-
2.11A, E-2.11B, E-2.11C, E-2.11D, E-2.12A, E-2.12B, E-2.12C, E-2.12D, E-2.13, E-2.14, E-3.00,
E-3.01, E-3.02, E-3.03, E-3.04, E-3.05, E-3.06, E-3.07, E-3.08, E-4.00, E-4.11A, E-4.11B, E-
4.11C, E-4.11D, E-4.12A, E-4.12B, E-4.12C, E-4.12D, E-5.00, E-5.01, E-5.11A, E-5.11B, E-
5.11C, E-5.11D, E-5.12A, E-5.12B, E-5.12C, E-5.12D, E-5.13, E-5.20, E-5.21, E-5.22, T-0.01, T-
1.11A, T-1.11B, T-1.11C, T-1.11D, T-1.12A, T-1.12B, T-1.12C, T-1.12D, T-2.01, T-202, T-3.00,
T-3.01, T-3.02, TL-100, TL-010, TL-102, TL-103, TL-104, TL-105, TL-106, TL-107, TR-100. TR-
101, TR-102, TR-103, TR-104, TR-105, TR-106, TR-107, TR-108, AV-0.01, AV-1.10, AV-0.02,
AV-0.03, AV-1.11A, AV-1.11B, AV-1.12A, AV-1.12B, AV-2.11A, AV-3.11, AV-4.00, AV-4.01, AV-
4.02, AV-4.03, AV-4.04, AV-4.05, AV-5.01, AV-5.02, AV-5.03, VS1.1.
The Trade Contractor shall also examine all other Drawings and all other Sections of the
Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this Section, not just those pertaining
to this Sub-trade.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work described herein shall be interpreted as work to be done by the Electrical Subcontractor.
Work to be performed by other trades will be referenced to a particular contractor or
subcontractor.
B. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, including scaffolding, to complete the
installation of the electrical system. Install, equip, adjust, and put into operation the respective
portions of the installation specified, and so interconnect various items or sections of work in order
to form a complete and operating whole. Systems may reference in singular or plural terms, also
refer to drawings confirm quantities. The work shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited
to, the following:
1. Primary, secondary and low tension ductbanks, manholes, and handholes.
2. Secondary distribution equipment, including secondary switchboard and metering, motor
controls, Variable Frequency Drives, dry-type transformers, distribution panels, and
panelboards, including feeders and subfeeders.
3. Fire alarm system, including Mass Notification System.
4. Emergency power system, including natural gas emergency generator, emergency lighting
and exit signs.
5. Lighting systems exterior and interior, fixtures, and a complete automated addressable
lighting control system with all sensors occupancy, daylight, photosensors, switches and
BACnet integration.
6. All raceway systems, including boxes, couplings, and fittings.
7. All branch circuit wiring systems, including wiring devices, and plates.
8. Excavation and backfill within building foundation walls for any underground raceways.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 3 of 145
9. Connections for all building equipment, including mechanical, plumbing, fire protection,
elevators, and the like.
10. All testing of equipment installed.
11. Any other item of work hereinafter specified or indicated on electrical drawings.
12. Drilling, coring, and cutting of holes for electrical conduit, systems, and equipment, where
the largest dimension thereof does not exceed 8 in. in diameter or the equivalent of cross-
sectional area of 8 in. x 8 in. for cutting or coring. All sleeve or boxouts, regardless of size
shall be provided by Electrial Sub-contractor.
13. Systems Identification.
14. Scaffolding Rigging and Staging required for all Electrical work, shall be provided in
accordance with Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
15. Coordination Drawings, refer to Section 01 3100.
16. Refer to Section 01 5000 for Temporary Power and Facilities
17. Alternates affecting this section.
18. Raceways system provisions for Technology systems including cable tray, outlet boxes,
raceway system, 120 volt sources as indicated on drawings and specified in Division 27.
19. Raceways system provisions for Integrated Electronic Security System including outlet
boxes, raceway system, 120 volt sources as indicated on drawings and specified in
Division 28.
20. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to achieve
sustainable design, measured and documented according to the LEED Green Building
Rating System, of the US Green Building Council. Refer to Section 01 8113,
SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY.
21. Section 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements and 26 0800 - Electrical Systems
Commissioning is included as work of this Section.
22. Firestop systems in accordance with section 07 8413 – Penetration Firestopping.
23. Variable Frequency Drives.
24. Power wiring to gas and water sub-meters, refer to Section 23 0000.
25. Electrical Vehicle charging equipment, EVSE
26. Lightning protection system.
27. Two-way call box system.
28. Emergency Responder Radio Signal Amplification, BDA System.
29. Provisions for PV as shown on drawings.
30. Any other item of work hereinafter specified or indicated on electrical drawings, or
referened on electrical drawings and shown on another trade.
C. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with Project Requirements intended to achieve a Certifiation,
measured and documented by LEED V4.
DEFINITIONS
A. Most terms used within the documents are industry standard. Certain words or phrases shall be
understood to have specific meanings as follows:
1. Provide: Furnish and install completely connected up and in operable condition.
2. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to a specific location within the building or site.
3. Install: With respect to equipment furnished by others, install means to receive, unpack,
move into position, mount and connect, including removal of packaging materials.
4. Conduit: Raceways of the metallic type which are not flexible. Specific types as specified.
5. Connect: To wire up, including all branch circuitry, control and disconnection devices so
item is complete and ready for operation.
6. Subject to Mechanical Damage: Equipment and raceways installed exposed and less than
eight feet above finished floor in mechanical rooms or other areas where heavy equipment
may be in use or moved.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 4 of 145
ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED ONLY
A. Furnish the following items for installation under designated sections.
1. Duct smoke detectors and duct carbon monoxide detectors with sampling tube – Section
23 0000 – HVAC.
2. Pre-cast pole bases to be installed by Site contractor.
3. Manholes and handholes – installed by Site Contractor.
4. Access Doors and Frames - Section 08 3100.
ITEMS TO BE INSTALLED ONLY
A. Install the following items furnished under designated sections.
1. Specialty backboxes – Section 27 0000.
2. Power operated window shades – Section 12 2413.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. The following related work is to be performed under designated sections.
1. LEED for school requirements: Refer to Section 01 8113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS.
2. Temp. Controls: Section 01 5000.
3. Excavation and Backfill (except within building foundation): DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK.
4. Pads and Duct Envelopes: SECTION 03 3000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
5. Insulation: SECTION 07 2100 – THERMAL INSULATION.
6. Finish Painting: SECTION 09 0007– PAINTING.
7. Cutting beyond 1.4, B.12 above and patching of all openings regardless of size shall be by
trade responsible for Section on which penetration occurs.
8. Automatic Temperature Control: SECTION 23 0000 – HVAC
9. Hardware: SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE and 28 1500 - INTEGRATED
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES.
10. Technology Wiring and Equipment: DIVISION 27 0000.
11. Integrated Electrical Security System Wiring: Section 28 0000 - Electronic Security
Systems General.
12. Power Operated Shades – SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
13. Section 019113 – Building Commissioning Requirements.
14. For coordination with structural trusses refer to Divsion 05 for required layout coordination.
15. Temporary Power and Lighting: Section 01 5000.
16. Sustainable Design:
Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management And Disposal
Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements
Section 01 5100 Construction Indoor Air Quality
Definitions: Refer to Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements for
definitions of terms used in this section.
17. Precast Concrete Pole Bases: Site Contractor.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The work of this section shall comply with requirements of the following:
1. SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
2. SECTION 01 4320 - QUALITY ASSURANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
3. SECTION 01 8113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 5 of 145
CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN
A. Submit a breakdown of contract price to aid Architect in determining value of work installed as job
progresses. The submission shall be broken out by sitework, and building. Each should then be
further broken out by materials, rough-in and finish work.
INSPECTION OF SITE
A. Electrical bidders will be permitted to inspect site. Failure to inspect existing conditions or to fully
understand work which is required shall not excuse
B. Electrical Subcontractor from his obligations to supply and install work in accordance with
specifications and the drawings and under all site conditions as they exist.
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Retain a competent representative on the project. Do not substitute representative without prior
approval from Owner.
COOPERATION
A. Work shall be carried on under usual construction conditions, in conjunction with other contractors
work. Cooperate with other contractors, coordinate work and proceed in a manner as not to delay
progress.
B. Before proceeding, examine all construction drawings and consult other contractors to coordinate
installation and avoid interference.
C. In case of dispute, the Architect will render a decision in accordance with General and
Supplementary General Conditions.
CODES, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS
A. Codes and Ordinances:
1. All material and work provided shall be in accordance with the following codes and
standards as most recently amended.
2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code
3. Massachusetts Electric Code, 2020 Edition
4. State Department of Public Safety
5. NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code"
6. NFPA Standards
7. NEMA TCB 2-2017
8. Standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
9. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
10. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
11. Energy Conservation Code
12. Town of Yarmouth
13. Where contract documents indicate more stringent requirements than codes, the contract
documents shall take precedence.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 6 of 145
B. Permits: Be responsible for filing documents, and securing of inspection and approvals. Pay all
local connection & permit fees. Costs related to temporary service, refer to Division 00. Refer to
AIA 201 General Conditions.
ELECTRICAL ROOMS OR SPACES
A. Be responsible for ensuring that the dedicated space and clearances required in the NEC, Section
110-26 are maintained for all electrical equipment.
B. Call other contractors' attention to the requirements contained in the above mentioned code
sections, prior to the installation of equipment by other contractors, in order to ensure no
violations.
SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 3300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, for requirements.
GUARANTEE
A. All parts of the work shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of
the job by Owner. If during that period of general guaranty, any part of the work fails, becomes
unsatisfactory, or does not function properly due to any fault in material or workmanship whether
or not manufactured or job built, the Owner shall upon notice from owner promptly proceed to
repair or replace such faulty material or workmanship without expense to owner, including cutting,
patching, and painting, or other work involved, and including repair or restoration of any damaged
sections of the premises resulting from such faults.
B. In the event that a repetition of any one defect occurs indicating the probability of further failure
and which can be traced to faulty design, material, or workmanship, then repair or replacement
shall not continue to be made but the fault shall be remedied by a complete replacement of the
entire defective unit.
C. In addition to the general guaranty, obtain and transmit to owner any guaranties or warranties
from manufacturers of specialties, but only as supplementary to the general guaranty which will
not be invalidated by same.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. In general, and unless specifically indicated otherwise, all building service, heating, ventilating,
air conditioning, and plumbing equipment shall be of the following characteristics:
B. Power Factor: All equipment provided rated greater than 1,000 watts and lighting equipment
greater than 15 watts with an inductive reactance load component shall have a power factor of
not less than 90 percent under rated load conditions.
1. Motors up to and including 1/3 HP shall be suitable for 120 volts, single phase operation.
2. Motors larger than 1/3 HP shall be suitable for 480 volts, three phase operation.
3. Electric heating equipment 4 KW and less shall be suitable for 277 volt single phase
operation. Over 4 KW shall be 480 volt three phase.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 7 of 145
TEMPORARY LIGHT & POWER
A. Refer to Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SUPPORT FACILITIES
A. Refer to Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
B. Provide own field office and/or storage facilities which shall be located as directed or permitted
by General Contractor and in accordance with local regulations. Provide all tools, equipment,
ladders, and temporary construction required for execution of the work.
C. All scaffolding, ladders, and other temporary construction shall be rigidly built in accordance with
all local and state requirements, and shall be removed upon completion.
INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Inspection: If inspection of materials installed shows defects, such defective work, materials,
and/or equipment shall be replaced and inspection and tests repeated.
B. Tests: Make reasonable tests and prove integrity of work and leave electrical installation in
correct adjustment and ready to operate. All panels and switchboards shall have phases
balanced as near as practical. A consistent phase orientation shall be adhered to at all
terminations.
ENERGY REBATE PROGRAM
A. This project has been designed to incorporate equipment approved for energy rebate such as
fixtures, performance lighting, building lighting controls, and VFDs. Meet with Utility Company
prior to lighting shop drawing submittal to ascertain that submittal meets program guidelines.
Fixtures shall be DLC listed or equivalent. Assist Owner and Engineer in effort to obtain utility
rebates the Owner is eligible for. Equivalent lighting fixtures which meet DLC shall require lighting
vendor to submit shop drawings to utility company for approval. It is the intent of this project to
Qualify for incentives which requires an additional 30 days of reported kWh saved and six months
of lighting energy use data as reported by the system post-insallation.
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM (I.T.S.) and SECURITY SYSTEM PROVISIONS
A. Electrical Sub-contractor shall work closely with the I.T.S. Sub-contractor, and Security System
Sub-contractor to assure a first class installation. Coordinate all back boxes and conduits
required prior to installations. In general, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide conduits from
systems outlets to accessible ceiling space.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing all related building preparation
including, but not limited to: power, cable trays, conduits with bushings, conduit stubs with
bushings, sleeves with bushings (all conduit, stubs, and sleeves, shall be brought to an accessible
ceiling of the same floor), backboxes, pull strings, bonding, grounding, for a completely
operational system, as specified and shown on Drawings.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 8 of 145
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Section 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES for requirements.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Division 01 – General Requirements.
STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Staging and scaffolding shall be of engineered design adequate and suitable for the intended
purpose and loading and in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and
regulations, shall have all accident prevention devices and other features required by Federal,
State and local laws and regulations, and shall be erected, maintained and removed by
experienced scaffolding/staging builders.
B. Each Trade Contractor entering upon the Work shall furnish, erect and maintain all staging and
scaffolding required for work under his subcontract. Each Trade Contractor shall provide access
to staging and scaffolding for all inspections by the Owner, OPM, Commissioning Agent or
Inspection Agency. Each Trade Contractor shall dismantle and remove such staging and
scaffolding on completion of his work and at other times as necessary to accommodate and
facilitate orderly progress of the Work including work by other trades.
C. The General Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain all staging and scaffolding related to
work within the top floor ceiling of the interior central stair space. The scaffolding at this location
shall be coordinated and scheduled to be installed to best and most efficiently be utilized by all
trades. The General Contractor shall be responsible to dismantle and remove staging and
scaffolding and shall notify trades prior to removal. Any trades not utilizing the scaffolding during
the allotted time shall be responsible to provide scaffolding for their work.
RETURN AIR PLENUM
A. All wiring systems in areas above hung ceiling shall either be run in conduit or shall be "UL listed"
plenum cable.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Penetrations through construction for the Work of this Section:
1. Coring/Cutting: Perform all coring for required work up to and including 8 in. in diameter or
equivalent in area of 8 in. square. Coring beyond 8 in. or cutting beyond the equivalent of
8 in. square will be performed by the General Contractor.
2. Notify Masonry Sub-Contractor of exact locations and sizes for openings required in
masonry, to be executed under Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry, utilizing lintels furnished
per Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.
3. Cut openings in new and existing non-masonry construction where required for
penetrations. All cutting shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 7300
EXECUTION..
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 9 of 145
B. Patching at penetrations through construction for the Work of this Section:
1. Notify Masonry Sub-Contractor when plumbing work is complete at penetrations through
masonry construction, and ready for patching under Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry.
2. Notify appropriate Sub-Contractors when plumbing work is complete at penetrations
through non-masonry construction, and ready for patching under Sections in Division 09 -
FINISHES.
C. Drilling, coring, and cutting of new and existing structures (through walls, floors, ceiling) where
the largest dimension does not exceed 8 in. diameter for drilling/coring or the equivalent of an
area equal to or less than 8 in. square shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
D. Throughout the performance of the cutting and coring work, ensure that the structural integrity of
the existing walls, floors, overhead structure, and other structural components, which are to
remain, is maintained until permanent work is installed. Prior to any coring or cutting verify all
locations of same with the General Contractor. All cutting and coring is to be performed in
accordance with approved coordination drawings. All cutting or coring of structural must receive
approval of the Architect prior to proceeding.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated
by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F. Patching of surfaces shall be by the trade responsible for the surface penetrated.
G. Refer to related architectural sections including Section 01 7300 for additional reference.
COMMISSIONING
A. Where indicated in the equipment or commissioning specifications, engage a factory-authorized
service representative, to perform startup service as per functional test sheets and requirements
of Section 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements and 26 0800 - Electrical Systems
Commissioning .
B. Complete installation and startup checks and functional tests according to Section 01 9113 –
General Commissioning Requirements and 26 0800 - Electrical Systems Commissioning and
manufacturers written instructions.
C. Operational Test: After electrical system has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit
operation. Rectify malfunctions, replace defective parts with new one and repeat the start up
procedure.
D. Verify that equipment is installed and commissioned as per requirements of section 01 9113 and
manufacturers written instructions/requirements.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN
A. SUMMARY
1. The Owner has established that this Project shall minimize the detrimental impacts on
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) resulting from construction activities. Factors that negatively
impact indoor air, such as the use of adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings which
exceed the minimum levels detailed in Division 01 shall not be permitted.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 10 of 145
B. REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. SMACNA IAQ: Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd Edition 2007,
ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3): The Steel Metal and Air Conditioner National
Contractors Association.
2. ANSI / ASHRAE 52.2-1999, “Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size”.
3. United States Environmental Protection Agency, “Compendium of Methods for the
Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air”
4. The United States Green Building Council “Green Building Design and Construction” 2009
Edition
C. LEED FOCUS MATERIALS
1. LEED Focus Materials for Divisions 26
2. VOC Products
3. Composite Wood and assemblies containing composite wood
4. Solid wood products and assemblies containing solid wood
5. Lamps that contain mercury (fluorescent; metal halide; mercury vapor)
D. LEED ACTION SUBMITTALS
1. Refer to Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements for detailed descriptions of
the submittal documents listed below.
2. LEED Reporting Form (LRF): Submit a completed LRF for the materials included in
Sections from Divisions 26 per LEED Reporting Form. Provide only the following
information:
The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content for all field-applied interior
adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used.
Material Costs for all Wood Based Materials (solid wood and Composite Wood).
If the VOC Budget Method has been selected as the LEED compliance path for
Credits EQc4.1 and EQc4.2 provide the Material Costs and VOC Volumes used for
applicable adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings.
3. Validation: Provide validation according to the Action Submittals requirements of Section
018113 “Sustainable Requirements Summary”.
VOC Content
FSC Certified Wood:
Composite Wood
Laminating Adhesives
Low Mercury Lamps
4. Submittal Package: LEED submittal information shall be assembled into 1 package per
Section or sub-contractor. Incomplete or inaccurate submittals may be used as the basis
for rejecting the submitted products or assemblies.
E. LEED QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Field-applied adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used for interior applications which
meet the volatile organic compound (VOC) and chemical component limitations defined in
Section “Volatile Organic Compound Limits”. This includes products both specified and
products not specified but required to complete the work of this section.
2. Composite Wood products that:
Do not contain added urea-formaldehyde resins.
Do not use laminating adhesive containing urea-formaldehyde
3. Wood Based Products (solid wood and composite wood) that are certified by the Forrest
Stewardship Council (FSC).
4. Mercury-containing lamps with less than 70 picograms per lumen hour of mercury content.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 11 of 145
F. INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
1. Carry out indoor air quality management measures and activities as required in Section 01
5100 Construction Indoor Air Quality.
G. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
1. Carry out construction waste management and disposal measures and activities as
required in Section 01 7419 –Construction Waste Mgmt and Disposal.
LEED v4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The work of this Section is required to comply with general requirements and procedures for
compliance with prerequisites and certain credits required for the Project to obtain Certified rating
based on USGBC's LEED v4 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction and as
outlined in Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED v4 BD+C: Schools”
(LEED v4).
1. The Construction Manager is responsible to coordinate with the work of other Sections and
comply with all LEED v4 requirements in accordance with the Contract Documents such
that the work carried out by this Section does not compromise the achievement of any
other LEED v4 prerequisites and credits applicable to the entire Project.
B. Related Sections for Sustainable Design Requirements:
1. Section 01 2513 “Product Substitutions” for product substitutions.
2. Section 01 3300 “Submittal Procedures” for LEED v4 submittal requirements.
3. Section 01 5000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for requirements for temporary
facilities.
4. Section 01 6000 “Product Requirements” for additional LEED v4 submittal requirements.
5. Section 01 7419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for waste management,
recycling and disposal.
6. Section01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements for general procedures for compliance
with LEED v4 prerequisites and credits.
7. Section 01 5100 Construction Indoor Air Quality for material and procedure requirements.
TRADE RESPONSIBILITY COORDINATION MATRIX
Device Furnished
By
Installed By Power
Wiring
Control
Wiring
Fire Alarm
Wiring
Notes
Smoke Detectors
(Area type)
26 00 00 26 00 00 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00
Smoke Detectors
(Duct mounted)
26 00 00 23 00 00 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00
Carbon Monoxide
Detectors (Duct
mounted)
26 00 00 23 00 00 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00
Smoke & Fire/Smoke
Dampers
23 00 00 23 00 00 N/A N/A N/A
Smoke & Fire/Smoke
Damper Actuators
23 00 00 23 00 00 26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00 2
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 12 of 145
Device Furnished
By
Installed By Power
Wiring
Control
Wiring
Fire Alarm
Wiring
Notes
Fire Dampers
23 00 00 23 00 00 N/A N/A N/A
VAV Boxes
23 00 00
23 00 00
26 00 00
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A
2
VAV Box Damper
Actuator
23 00 00
(ATC)
Box Mfr 23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 2
VAV Box DDC
Controller
23 00 00
(ATC)
Box Mfr 23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 2
Hydronic Control
Valves
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00 N/A 23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 1
Hydronic Control
Valve Actuator
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 1
Sheet Metal Damper
23 00 00 23 00 00 N/A N/A N/A 1, 7
Sheet Metal Damper
Actuators
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 1, 7
Natural Gas Energy
Meters
23 00 00
(ATC)
22 00 01 26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 3
Electrical Energy
Meters
26 00 00 26 00 00 26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 3
Domestic Water
Meters
23 00 00
(ATC)
22 00 01 26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 3
HVAC Hydronic
Energy Meters
23 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 3
Airflow Measuring
Stations
AHU
Manufacturer
AHU
Manufacturer
N/A 23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A
DDC Panels
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00 &
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 4, 8
VFDs at RTU & MAU
230000 230000
(RTU MFG.)
26 00 00 230000
(ATC)
N/A 11
VFDs at EFs (except
Kitchen EF), Pumps
& AHUs
26 00 00 26 00 00 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A 10
VFDs at EFs (except
Kitchen EF), Pumps
& AHUs
26 00 00 26 00 00 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A
Elevator Hoistway
Vent Damper
23 00 00 23 00 00 N/A N/A N/A
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 13 of 145
Device Furnished
By
Installed By Power
Wiring
Control
Wiring
Fire Alarm
Wiring
Notes
Elevator Hoistway
Vent Damper
Actuator
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00
Emergency
Shower/Eye Wash
22 00 01 22 00 01 26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
N/A
Boiler Breeching
23 00 00 23 00 00 N/A N/A N/A 5
DHW Breeching 22 00 01 22 00 01 N/A N/A N/A
Kitchen Emergency
Gas Valve
22 00 01 22 00 01 26 00 00 26 00 00 26 00 00
Kitchen Energy
Management System
Food Service
Contractor
Food Service
Contractor
26 00 00 23 00 00
(ATC)
26 00 00
Rooftop Mechanical
Plant
230000 230000 26 00 00 230923 26 00 00 9
Notes:
1. Division 23 00 00 and Division 23 00 00 (ATC) Contractors shall fully coordinate all airflow
damper and hydronic valves sizes and quantities.
2. Smoke Damper and VAV Box power wiring shall be provided by Division 26 00 00 to
junction box locations shown on electrical drawings; Division 23 00 00 (ATC) Contractor
shall provide final power wiring from junction box to end device location.
3. Division 26 00 00 Contractor shall provide all line-voltage power wiring required for meters;
Division 23 00 00 (ATC) Contractor shall provide all low-voltage power wiring required for
meters.
4. Division 26 00 00 shall provide power at main DDC Panel. Division 23 00 00 (ATC) shall
provide power to all other DDC Panels.
5. Boiler and domestic hot water heater flue exhaust breeching and combustion air intake
ductwork shall be provided by the mechanical plant and enclosure manufacturer.
6. VFDs for HVAC pumps located within rooftop mechanical plant enclosure shall be provided
by rooftop mechanical plant and enclosure manufacturer.
7. Sheetmetal dampers and actuators, required for rooftop mechanical plant (RMPE) and
enclosure shall be provided by RMPE manufacturer.
8. DDC panel required for rooftop mechanical plant and enclosure (RMPE) shall be provided
by RMPE manufacturer.
9. Division 230000 to field install pipe and duct insulation and all mechanical equipment
identification. Division 22 0001 to field install all piping and equipment insulation and
identification.
10. Division 26 00 00 shall provide VFDs for all EFs and pumps with exception to EFs and/or
pumps provided with ECM motors. ECM motors are specified in Division 23 00 00 and
provided by Division 23 00 00 coordinate with mechanical schedules and specifications.
11. Power wiring for RTU, HV, MAU, AHU & ERV shall be a single point connector made by
the Electrical Contractor (26 00 00). Integral wiring and connections shall be provided by
Division 23 00 00.
12. Division 26 00 00 shall provide dedicated 120V, 20 amp branch circuit for service light and
receptacles for all RTU’s and MAU. Division 26 00 00 shall provide GFI/WP type
receptacles within 20 ft. of all RTU’s and MAU and type “J” fixtures with switch in unit
vestibules and service areas within units.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 14 of 145
13. Generator breeching for diesel fired generators is provided by 23 00 00. Generator
breeching for natural gas fired generators is provided by Division 22 00 01.
ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 012300 for Alternates affecting this section.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A. Product specifications are written in such a manner so as to specify what materials may be used
in a particular location or application and therefore do not indicate what is not acceptable or
suitable for a particular location or application. As an example: non-metallic sheathed cable is
not specified; therefore, it is not acceptable.
B. For purpose of establishing a standard of quality and not for purpose of limiting competition, the
basis of this Specification is upon specified models and types of equipment and materials, as
manufactured by specified manufacturers.
C. In all cases, standard cataloged materials and systems have been selected. Materials such as
lighting fixtures specially manufactured for this particular project and not part of a manufacturers'
standard product line will not be acceptable. In the case of systems, the system components
shall be from a single source regularly engaged in supplying such systems. A proposed system
made up of a collection of various manufacturers' products will be unacceptable.
D. Where Specifications list manufacturers' names and/or "Or Equal", other manufacturers'
equipment will be considered if equipment meets Specification requirements and has all features
of the specified items as are considered essential by Architect (and/or Engineer). In al cases the
Architect (and/or Engineer) decision shall be final and binding. No exceptions.
E. All material shall be new and shall be UL listed.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Raceways - General:
1. No raceway shall be used smaller than ¾ in. diameter and shall have no more than four
90o bends in any one run, and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided. Only rigid
metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit is allowed for slab work. Cable systems, if
allowed to be used by other sections of this specification, shall not be used exposed or in
slabs, whether listed by "UL" for such use or not.
2. Rigid metal conduit conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 344 shall be
heavy wall zinc coated steel conforming to American Standard Specification C80-1 and
may be used for service work, exterior work, slab work, and below grade level slab, wet
locations, and in mechanical rooms for drops down to equipment from elevations below
eight feet and also where raceway may be subject to mechanical damage.
3. Intermediate metal conduit conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 342,
may be used for all applications where rigid metal conduit is allowed by these
specifications.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 15 of 145
4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article
358 shall be zinc coated steel, conforming to industry standards, may be used in masonry
block walls, stud partitions, above furred ceilings, where exposed but not subject to
mechanical damage, and may be used for fire alarm work.
5. Surface metal raceways conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 386 may
be used only where raceways cannot be run concealed, and then, if only specifically
approved.
6. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to recessed lighting fixtures from
above ceiling junction boxes and for final flexible connections to motors and other rotating
or vibrating equipment. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for the above
connections which are located in moist locations. All flexible connections shall include an
insulated grounding conductor.
7. Rigid non-metallic conduit may be used for underground electric and telephone services
outside the foundation wall and also below slab and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
schedule 40, 90 deg. C. Rigid metal conduits shall be used thru-foundation walls and thru-
slab. Below slab conduits do not require concrete encasement.
8. PVC Schedule 40 may be used for below slab circuits within building confines. Below slab
rigid non-metallic conduits do not require concrete encasement. Rigid non-metallic
conduits may be used for below slab feeders and branch circuits, but shall not be used in
slabs, nor for elbows which penetrate slabs. Raceways and fittings shall be produced by
same manufacturer.
9. PVC schedule 40 may also be used for underground branch circuits outside the foundation
wall.
10. PVC schedule EB conduit will be used as indicated on Electrical Site Plan, and where
encased in concrete.
11. Acceptable manufacturers:
Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Company
Republic Steel and Tube
Youngstown Sheet and Tube Company
Carlon
Or equal
12. Fittings:
Provide insulated bushings on all raceways 1 inch diameter or larger.
Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used for raceway supports.
Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings shall be used where structural and concrete
expansion joints occur and shall include a ground strap. Bond separate buildings in
accordance with code.
Couplings for rigid metal and intermediate metal conduit shall be threaded type.
Threadless fittings for EMT shall be watertight compression type or set-screw type
(dry-locations). All fittings shall be concrete tight. No diecast fittings allowed except
for raceways larger than 1 inch diameter.
Cable supports in vertical raceways shall be of the split wedge type. Armored cable
supports for vertical runs to be of wire mesh basket design.
Wall entrance seals shall be equal to O.Z. Gedney type "WSK".
Couplings, elbows and other fittings used with rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be of
the solvent cemented type to secure a waterproof installation.
1) Acceptable manufacturers:
a) O.Z.
b) Crouse Hinds
c) Appleton
d) EFCOR
e) Steel City
f) Or equal
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 16 of 145
B. Outlets, Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Outlets:
Each outlet in wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit
conditions encountered. Boxes installed in normally wet locations or surface
mounted shall be of the cast-metal type having hubs. Concealed boxes shall be
cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type. Old work boxes with Madison
clamps not allowed in new construction. Thru the wall boxes are not permitted.
Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate number of conductors in
accordance with requirements of Code. Boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2 in. deep
unless shallower boxes are required by structural conditions and are specifically
approved by Architect. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 in.
octagonal except that smaller boxes may be used where required by particular
fixture to be installed. Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate
junction boxes when required by fixture terminal temperature requirements. Switch
and receptacle boxes shall be 4 in. square or of comparable volume.
Far side box supports shall be Caddy J-1A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Appleton
2) Crouse Hinds
3) Steel City
4) RACO
5) Or equal
2. Pull and Junction Boxes: Where indicated on plans, and where necessary to terminate,
tap off, or redirect multiple raceway runs or to facilitate conductor installation, furnish, and
install appropriately designed boxes. Boxes shall be fabricated from code gauge steel
assembled with corrosion resistant machine screws. Box size shall be sized per Code.
Pencell fiberglass handholes are allowed as a substitute for Quazite handholes with H20
wheel load covers.
3. Boxes in moist or wet areas shall be galvanized type. Boxes larger than 4-11/16 inches
square shall have hinged covers. Boxes larger than 12 inches in one dimension will be
allowed to have screw fastened covers, if a hinged cover would not be capable of being
opened a full 90 degrees due to installation location.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Brasch
2) Hoffman
3) Keystone
4) Lee Products Co.
5) McKinstry Inc.
6) Eldon Inc.
7) Or equal
CONDUCTORS
A. All conductors shall be a minimum size of #12 AWG except for control wiring and fire alarm wiring
where #14 AWG may be used. For all exit sign circuits, normal/emergency and/or emergency
only circuits, exterior lighting circuits, and also where distance from panelboard to first outlet
exceeds 80 ft. at 120 volts and 150 ft. at 277 volts, #10 AWG shall be minimum size wire allowed.
All feeder and branch circuit conductor shall be color coded as follows:
1. 208Y/120V Phase A Black
2. 208Y/120V Phase B Red
3. 208Y/120V Phase C Blue
4. 480Y/277V Phase A Brown
5. 480Y/277V Phase B Orange
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 17 of 145
6. 480Y/277V Phase C Yellow
7. Grounded Conductor
120/208 White
277/480 Grey
8. Equipment Ground
120/208 Green
277/480 Green with Yellow Trace
9. Isolated Ground 120/208 Green with Orange Trace
B. All conductors not installed in accordance with color scheme shall be replaced. All conductors
larger than #6 AWG must be identified with colored tape.
C. Comply with CMR 527, Massachusetts Electrical Code.
D. Comply with Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) standards:
1. UL 4: Armored Cable.
2. UL 62: Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire.
3. UL 83: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
4. UL 486A: Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
5. UL1569: Metal -Clad Cables.
E. Comply with NEMA WC-5: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
F. Connections throughout the entire job shall be made with solderless type devices.
1. For #10 AWG and smaller: spring type.
2. For #8 AWG and larger: circumferential compression type.
3. Acceptable manufacturers:
3M "Scotchlock"
IDEAL "Wingnut"
BURNDY
MAC
Or equal
4. Any splices made up in ground mounted pull boxes shall be resin cast waterproof type or
waterproof pressure type, as manufactured by King Technology, St. Louis, MO.
G. Conductors shall be copper, soft drawn, and annealed of 98 percent conductivity. Conductors
larger than #10 AWG shall be stranded; #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Conductors shall
be insulated for 600 volts and be of following types:
1. All conductors shall have heat/moisture resistant thermoplastic insulation type
THHN/THWN (75 degrees C) except as follows:
In sizes #1 AWG and larger: Crosslinked polyethylene insulation type XHHW (75
degrees C – 90 degrees C) may be used.
Fire alarm system conductors shall be #14 AWG, type THHN, solid. Color coding
of fire alarm conductors shall be in accordance with fire codes.
Fixture whips #16AWG type "SF".
H. Stranded conductors for all wiring systems except fire alarm will be allowed if installed and
terminated as specified under Execution Section.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 18 of 145
I. Mineral-Insulated Metal-Sheathed Fire-Resistive Cables (Type MI) - Cables shall consist of a
factory assembly of one or more solid copper conductors insulated with highly-compressed
magnesium oxide and enclosed in a seamless, liquid-and-gas-tight continuous copper sheath.
Cables shall be rated for 600 volts and less. Cables shall comply with Article 332 of the National
Electrical Code. Cables shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as having a 2-hour
fire resistive rating. Cable terminations shall be made with UL listed mineral-insulated cable
fittings. Approved Manufacturer - Pyrotenax USA, Inc. or approved equal.
J. Type MC Cable may be used for concealed branch circuits in hollow spaces where allowed by
code if installed and terminated as specified under Execution Section. Armor shall be galvanized
steel and shall be UL listed for 2 hour fire wall penetration. Aluminum armor is not acceptable.
K. Type MC Cable may also be used for fire alarm where concealed and allowed by Code. Armor
shall be red.
L. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems
2. American Wire & Cable
3. Cerro
4. Cornish
5. Cresent
6. General Cable
7. Okonite
8. Or equal
M. Installation of conductors and cables
1. Install all power and 120 volt control wire and cable in approved raceways. When low
tension wiring is run exposed, install it in conduit. Plenum rated low tension cable may be
used for installation above suspended ceilings where it is allowed by the Code and is
allowed in the specification for the specific system.
Wire Size:
1) Install minimum No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
2) Install minimum No. 10 AWG for 120 volt 20 ampere branch circuits of 75 feet
to 150 feet length, and minimum No. 8 AWG for the circuits of 150 feet to 250
feet unless otherwise shown on the drawings or required by the equipment
shop drawings.
3) Install minimum No. 10 AWG for 277 volt 20 ampere branch circuits of more
than 150 feet unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
2. Metal clad cable type MC may be used for branch circuit wiring above suspended ceilings
and for device wiring in the metal stud partitions. MC cable shall not be used for a
termination at the panels (homeruns) and where they run exposed. Any wiring associated
with Smoke control systems can not be installed in MC cable as it does not meet 780 CMR
Section 909.12.1.
3. Bundle conductors #10 and smaller in branch circuit panelboards, signal cabinets, signal
control boards in switchboards and motor control centers.
4. Homerun Circuits:
Follow homerun circuit numbers shown on the drawings to connect circuits to the
panelboards. Where homerun circuit numbers are not shown on the drawings, divide
similar types of connected loads among phase busses so that currents in each
phase are within 10 percent of each other during normal usage.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 19 of 145
Wire multi-wire branch circuit homerun with two or three single phase and one
common neutral conductor to a panel in a such manner that each phase circuit is
fed from the adjacent circuit breakers. Do not combine circuits so that any homerun
has more than three circuits (total of five wires) installed in one conduit, unless the
circuit conductors are de-rated in strict accordance with the referenced Electrical
Code.
Branch circuit wiring in the classrooms, laboratories and offices shall be provided
with a dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor.
5. Properly group feeders, branch circuit and auxiliary system wiring passing through pull
boxes and/or being made up in panelboards; neatly bind each group of wires together with
plastic cable ties, and trim loose ends of the ties.
6. Peel branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring out of the wiring gutters at the terminal
cabinet and panels at 90 degrees to circuit breakers and terminal lugs before making
connections.
7. Color code conductors No. 6 AWG and larger by applying colored plastic tape at ends and
where connections and splices are made. Wrap tape around the conductor three complete
turns.
8. Splices and Terminations:
Make splices and joints by means of UL-listed, solderless connectors rated 600 volt,
of sizes and types required by manufacturer's recommendations, with temperature
ratings equal to that of wire.
Attach copper wire to panelboards, switchboards, disconnect switches and other
electrical equipment by means of bolt-on lugs with hex screws. Properly size lugs;
do not cut strands from a conductor in order to fit conductor into a lug.
Connectors for cables 250 MCM and larger shall have two clamping elements and
terminals for bus connections shall have two bolt holes.
9. Identification: Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26
Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Label feeder and branch circuits in pull and
junction boxes, handholes and at cable terminations in the panelboards, motor control
centers, and switchboards. Use non-ferrous tags or labels stamped or printed to
correspond with markings on the drawings or marked so that feeder or cable may be
identified readily. If suspended tags are provided, attach with nylon line or cable lacing.
10. Connect branch circuits to the breakers in multi-phase panelboards required to balance
loads.
11. Provide handle ties for multiwire branch circuits as required in the NEC
12. Low Tension Cables: Provide separation from power wiring and lighting fixtures as follows:
Lighting fixtures - at least 6 inches.
Power branch circuit wiring with MC type cable - at least 12 inches.
Power branch circuit wiring in metal conduit - at least 6 inches.
13. When low-tension cables are not in conduit or trays, support cables from the deck and/or
beams, spacing supports no farther apart than 6'-0 in. on center. Provide hangers, clips or
other approved method of grouping the cables and keeping them away from other systems.
Take care to ensure that ties, clips and other support devices do not compress the cable
or damage cable insulation; use J-hooks whenever possible.
14. Cable Supports:
Provide cable supports for vertical feeders required by the referenced Electrical
Code.
Support vertical feeders at each floor level.
Support and secure metal-clad cable Type MC at intervals not exceeding 6 feet and
within 12 inches from every outlet box, junction box or cabinet.
Support metal clad cable Type MC with cable supports equal to Caddy WMX-6, MX-
3, and clamps equal to Caddy 449. Where cables are supported by the structure
and only need securing in place, then cable ties will be acceptable.
15. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 20 of 145
16. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound
used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
17. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,
that will not damage cables or raceway.
18. For wiring in high temperature areas or high temperature equipment (i.e. boiler rooms,
water heaters/boosters), furnish conductors for 90 deg.C dry and wet rating.
ACCESS PANELS
A. Refer to section 083100 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS for requirements.
B. Provide access panels for access to concealed junction boxes and to other concealed parts of
system that require accessibility for operation and maintenance. In general, electrical work shall
be laid out so access panels are not required. Provide fire rated panels for rated partitions, shafts,
etc.
SLEEVES, INSERTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Sleeves: Provide sleeves of proper sizes for all openings required in concrete floors and walls.
Sleeves passing through floors shall be set with top of sleeve 1 in. above finished floor. Core
drilling will also be acceptable if in accordance with any structural standards. Any unsleeved
openings shall be waterproofed.
B. Inserts: Provide inserts or other anchoring devices in concrete and masonry construction to
support raceways and equipment.
C. Openings: Where an opening is required in concrete slabs to allow passage of a multitude of
raceways, give adequate notice to General Contractor.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Specified Technologies Inc.
2. Thomas & Betts
3. International Protective Coatings Corp.
4. 3M Fire Protection Products
5. Dow Corning
6. Or equal
FLOOR OUTLETS (FLUSH TYPE)
A. Section includes flush floor boxes equal to Wiremold RFB Series. Provide appropriate floor box
model that meets the intent of what is shown on the drawings.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Electrical Raceways and Components: Comply with requirements of applicable local
codes, NEC, UL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways and components. Listed
and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 100.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 21 of 145
C. Floor Boxes
1. RFB4 and RFB4-4DB Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and
approved for use on above grade floors. The box shall be 12-3/4 in. L x 10 in. W x 3-7/16
in. H [324mm x 254mm x 87mm]. Provide the box with four (4) independent wiring
compartments that allow capacity for up to four (4) duplex receptacles, communication
and/or audio/video services. The RFB4 Series Box shall permit tunneling from end power
compartment to end power compartment. The RFB4-4DB Series Box shall permit tunneling
from adjacent or opposite compartments. Two (2) of the four (4) compartments shall have
a minimum wiring capacity of 16.4 cu in [269cu cm], one (1) compartment shall have a
minimum capacity of 32.3 cu in [529cu cm], and one (1) compartment shall have a minimum
capacity of 50 cu in [820cu cm]. Four (4) compartments shall have a minimum of two (2)
inches of space behind the device plates. The box shall include the following number of
conduit knockouts: one (1) 1/2-inch [12.7mm], three (3) 1-inch [25mm], six (6) 3/4-inch
[19.1mm], and six (6) 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a
maximum of 1-7/8-inch [47.7mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a maximum of 3/4-inch
[19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series of device mounting plates
that will accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that will accommodate
Ortronics® workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters, Legrand AVIP
audio/video device plates, and other open system devices.
2. RFB4-CI-1 and RFB4-CI-NA Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from cast-iron and
approved for use on grade and above grade floors. The box shall be 14-1/2 in. L x 11-7/8
in. W x 3-7/16 in. H [368mm x 302mm x 87mm]. Provide the box with four (4) independent
wiring compartments that allow capacity for up to four (4) duplex receptacles and/or
communication services. The box shall permit tunneling from adjacent or opposite
compartments. Two (2) of the four (4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity
of 27 cu in [443cu cm], and two (2) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of
36 cu in [590cu cm]. Four (4) compartments shall have a minimum of two (2) inches of
space behind the device plates. The box shall include the following number of conduit
hubs: four (4) 1-inch [25mm] and four (4) 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully
adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-7/8-inch [48mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a
maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series of
device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that
will accommodate Ortronics® workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters,
Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system devices.
3. RFB4-SS Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped-steel and approved for use on
above grade floors. The box shall be 13-5/8 in. L x 10 in. W x 2-7/16 in. H [346mm x 254mm
x 62mm]. Provide the box with four (4) independent wiring compartments that allow
capacity for up to four (4) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services.
The box shall permit feed through tunneling from adjacent compartments. Two (2) of the
four (4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 15.7 cu in [257cu cm] and
two (2) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 31.2 cu in [511cu cm]. Four
(4) compartments shall have a minimum of two (2) inches of space behind the device
plates. The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: two (2) 1/2-inch [12.7mm], six (6) 3/4-inch [19.1mm], and eight (8) 1-inch [25mm]. The box shall be fully
adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-7/8-inch [48mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a
maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series of
device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that
will accommodate Ortronics® workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters,
Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system devices.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 22 of 145
4. RFB4E Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and approved for use on
above grade floors. The box shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 13-1/8 in. W x 4-1/16 in. H [333mm x
333mm x 103mm]. Provide the box with four (4) independent wiring compartments that
allow capacity for up to four (4) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video
services. The box shall permit feed through removable barriers from adjacent
compartments. Four (4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 75 cu in
[1230cu cm]. Four (4) compartments shall have a minimum of 3-1/2 inches of space behind
the device plates. The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: six
3/4-inch [19.1mm], ten (10) 1-inch [25mm], and eight (8) 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall
have two removable knockout plates that can be replaced with a 2-inch trade size conduit
hub (2HUB). The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a maximum of 2-inch [35mm] pre-
pour adjustment, and a maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box
shall include a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices
as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets and
modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system
devices.
5. RFB4E-OG Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and painted with a
fusion-bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories
before encapsulation in concrete, and approved for use on grade and above grade floors.
The box shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 13-1/8 in. W x 4-1/16 in. H [333mm x 333mm x 103mm].
Provide the box with four (4) independent wiring compartments that allow capacity for up
to four (4) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. The box shall
permit feed through removable barriers from adjacent compartments. Four (4)
compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 75 cu in [1230cu cm]. Four (4)
compartments shall have a minimum of 3-1/2 inches of space behind the device plates.
The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: six 3/4-inch [19.1mm],
ten (10) 1-inch [25mm], and eight (8) 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall have two removable
knockout plates that can be replaced with a 2-inch trade size conduit hub (2HUB). The
box shall be fully adjustable, providing a maximum of 2-inch [35mm] pre-pour adjustment,
and a maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series
of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that
will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters,
Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system devices.
6. RFB6 Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and approved for use on
above grade floors. The box shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 12-1/2 in. W x 3-1/4 in. H [333mm x
317mm x 83mm]. Provide the box with six (6) independent wiring compartments that allow
capacity for up to six (6) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services.
The box shall permit feed through tunneling from adjacent compartments. Two (2) of the
six (6) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 23 cu in [376cu cm] and four
(4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 52cu in [850cu cm]. Four (4) of
the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum of 3-1/4 inches of space behind the device
plates and two (2) of the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum of 2-3/8 inches of
space behind the device plates. The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: twelve 3/4-inch [19.1mm], four (4) 1-inch [25mm], and twelve 1-1/4-inch
[32mm]. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-3/8-inch [35mm] pre-
pour adjustment, and a maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box
shall include a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices
as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets and
modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system devices.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 23 of 145
7. FB6-OG Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and painted with a fusion-
bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories before
encapsulation in concrete, and approved for use on grade and above grade floors. The box
shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 12-1/2 in. W x 3-1/4 in. H [333mm x 317mm x 83mm]. Provide the
box with six (6) independent wiring compartments that allow capacity for up to six (6) duplex
receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. The box shall permit feed
through tunneling from adjacent compartments. Two (2) of the six (6) compartments shall
have a minimum wiring capacity of 23 cu in [376cu cm] and four (4) compartments shall
have a minimum wiring capacity of 52cu in [850cu cm]. Four (4) of the six (6) compartments
shall have a minimum of 3-1/4 inches of space behind the device plates and two (2) of the
six (6) compartments shall have a minimum of 2-3/8 inches of space behind the device
plates. The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: twelve 3/4-inch
[19.1mm], four (4) 1-inch [25mm], and twelve 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully
adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-3/8-inch [35mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a
maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment.
The box shall include a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power
devices as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets
and modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system
devices.
8. RFB6E Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and approved for use on
above grade floors. The box shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 12-1/2 in. W x 4 in. H [333mm x 317mm
x 102mm]. Provide the box with six (6) independent wiring compartments that allow
capacity for up to six (6) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services.
The box shall permit feed through tunneling from adjacent compartments through 1-1/4-
inch grommet openings. Two (2) of the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum wiring
capacity of 23 cu in [376cu cm] and four (4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring
capacity of 52cu in [850cu cm]. Four (4) of the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum
of 3-1/4 inches of space behind the device plates and two (2) of the six (6) compartments
shall have a minimum of 2-3/8 inches of space behind the device plates. The box shall
contain the following number of conduit knockouts: twelve 3/4-inch [19.1mm], four (4) 1-
inch [25mm], and twelve 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a
maximum of 1-3/8-inch [35mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm]
after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series of device mounting plates that will
accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics
workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device
plates, and other open system devices.
9. RFB6E-OG Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and painted with a
fusion-bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories
before encapsulation in concrete, and approved for use on grade and above grade floors.
The box shall be 13-1/8 in. L x 12-1/2 in. W x 4 in. H [333mm x 317mm x 102mm]. Provide
the box with six (6) independent wiring compartments that allow capacity for up to six (6)
duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. The box shall permit feed
through tunneling from adjacent compartments. Two (2) of the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 23 cu in [376cu cm] and four (4) compartments shall
have a minimum wiring capacity of 52cu in [850cu cm]. Four (4) of the six (6) compartments
shall have a minimum of 3-1/4 inches of space behind the device plates, and two (2) of the
six (6) compartments shall have a minimum of 2-3/8 inches of space behind the device
plates. The box shall contain the following number of conduit knockouts: twelve 3/4-inch
[19.1mm], four (4) 1-inch [25mm], and twelve 1-1/4-inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-3/8-inch [35mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a
maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment.
The box shall include a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power
devices as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 24 of 145
and modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system
devices.
D. Activation Covers
1. FloorPort FPCT, FPBT, and FPFFT Series Covers: Manufactured of die-cast aluminum or
die-cast zinc, and available in brushed aluminum finish and powder-coated paint finishes
(black, gray, bronze, nickel and brass). Activation covers shall be available in flanged and
flangeless versions. Covers shall be available with options for tile or carpet inserts, or flush
covers. The cover’s hinge shall allow for the cover to open 180 degrees. The furniture
feed covers shall come equipped with one (1) 1-inch trade size screw plug opening and
one (1) combination 1-1/4-inch and 2-inch trade size screw plug.
Flanged covers shall be 7-3/4 in. L x 6-9/16 in. W [197mm x 167mm].
Flangeless covers shall be 6-3/4 in. L x 5-9/16 in. W [171mm x 142mm].
2. 6CT, 6CTC, 6CFFTC, 8CTC, and 8CT Series Covers: Manufactured of die-cast aluminum
alloy and available in powder-coated gray, black, brass, nickel or bronze finish. The covers
shall be available in carpet and tile versions. Provide covers with two (2) gaskets (one (1)
for carpet and one (1) for tile) to go under the trim flange to maintain scrub water tightness.
The activation cover for the 8CTC and 8CT series shall be 9-1/4-inch [235mm] in diameter.
The activation cover for the 6CT and 6CTC series shall be 7-1/4-inch [184mm] in diameter
and the activation cover for the 6CFFTC series shall be 7-3/4-inch [197mm] in diameter.
The carpet covers shall be surface mounted and the tile covers shall be flush with the
finished floor covering. The covers shall have spring loaded slides to allow cables to egress
out of the unit and maintain as small an egress opening as possible.
3. The covers shall have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. and Canadian
safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet
covered floors.
E. Communication Modules Mounting Accessories
1. The floor box manufacturer shall provide a complete line of faceplates and bezels to
facilitate mounting of UTP, STP (150 ohm), fiber optic, coaxial, and communication
devices. The box shall provide a series of device mounting plates that will accommodate
Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters, and other open system
devices.
F. Installation
1. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and
approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper
clearances and to prevent electrical hazards.
2. Mechanical Security: Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected
to all electrical outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, in accordance with
manufacturer’s installation sheets.
3. Accessories: Provide accessories as required for a complete installation, including
insulated bushings and inserts where required by manufacturer.
4. Unused Openings: Close unused box openings using manufacturer's recommended
accessories.
5. Provide a minimum concrete pour depth of 3-7/16-inch [87mm] plus 1/16-inch [1.6mm]
above the top of the box for the RFB4, RFB4-4DB, RFB2, and the RFB2-OG Series Boxes;
2-7/16-inch [62mm] plus 1/16-inch [1.6mm] for the RFB4-SS and RFB2-SS Series Boxes;
and 3-7/16-inch [87mm] plus 13/16-inch [21mm] above the top of the box for the RFB4-CI-
1, RFB6, and RFB6-OG Series Boxes; and 4-1/16-inch [103mm] above the top of the
RFB4E and RFB4E-OG Series Boxes; and 4-inch [102mm] above the top of the RFB6E
and RFB6E-OG Series Boxes. Provide the box with four (4) locations to accommodate
leveling for pre-concrete pour adjustment and include four (4) leveling screws for the pre-
pour adjustment.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 25 of 145
G. Poke-Through Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold
2. Poke-Thru Assembly
Floor Fitting
1) The floor fitting shall consist of an insert and an activation cover. Floor fitting
shall accommodate power and communications services in a single unit. Floor
fitting shall have one ¾ in. trade size channel for power and one 2 in. trade
size channel for communication cabling. Floor fitting shall consist of
intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab and
UL Listed with a fire rating of 1, 1½, & 2 hours in an unprotected reinforced
concrete floor or a 1 or 2 hour rating in floors employing steel floor units and
concrete topping. The floor fitting shall be suitable in concrete floor
thicknesses of 2.5 in. or greater. The insert shall have 12 installation barbs
that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners.
Insert Body
1) The insert body shall allow the devices to be recessed 3.5-inches, or 2.25-
inches with the use of 1 ¼ in. supplied stand-offs. There shall be complete
separation of channels allowing for individual separation of power and
communications services. There shall be one channel arranged such that
communication cables can be conduit protected and connected with a 2-inch
trade size openings to accept both rigid and flexible conduit connectors. The
inserts shall consist of multiple compartments that allow for up to 2 duplex
receptacles that can be wired in configurations including standard
receptacles, isolated ground or up to 12 communication ports.
Activation Cover/ Flange Assembly
1) Activation covers and Flange shall be manufactured of die-cast aluminum
alloy and be capable of being plated in brushed brass, satin nickel, and
bronze finish, lacquer coated brushed aluminum or powder-coated in , black,
finishes. Flange shall be suitable for either carpet, tile, terrazzo and wood
covered floors. Flange shall include a gasket adhered to the top inside surface
to maintain scrub water tightness with sub plates. Flange shall include a
gasket for assembly against the floor to maintain scrub water tightness. Cover
assembly shall provide a single hinged access doors that rotate 180 degrees
flush with flange and incorporate foam gaskets to maintain scrub water
tightness by preventing water, dirt, and debris from entering the power and
communication compartment. Cover assembly shall feature cable access
doors which secure to the underside of the closed cover that allow each cable
access door to be opened and closed independently
Communication Modules Mounting Accessories
1) The poke-through manufacture shall have available modular inserts to
facilitate mounting UTP (including Category 5, 5e, 6, 6a), STP, fiber optic,
coaxial, and data/communications devices. The S1R6 series shall
accommodate Extron MAAP or Extron AAP adapter plates. Where indicated
provide connectivity outlets and modular inserts by Hubbell or approved
equal.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 26 of 145
H. FURNITURE FEED POKE-THRU DEVICES
1. Poke-Through Assemblies:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hubbell.
2) Pass & Seymour.
3) Thomas & Betts Corporation.
4) Wiremold
2. Classification and Use: Furniture feed poke-thru devices shall have been examined and
tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to meet UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian
Standard C22.2, No. 18-98 and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. Furniture
poke-thru devices shall also have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and
Classified for fire resistance and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark.
Poke-thru devices are approved for use in recessed and flush floor construction and meet
and exceed the UL scrub water exclusion test.
Devices shall be classified for use in 1-, 1-1/2-, or 2-hour rated, unprotected
reinforced concrete floors and 1-, 1-1/2-, or 2-hour rated floors employing
unprotected steel floor units and concrete toppings (D900 Series designs), or
concrete floors with suspended ceilings. Fire resistive designs with suspended
ceilings shall have provisions for accessibility in the ceiling below the poke-thru
fittings.
These devices are not suitable for wet or damp locations, or other areas subject to
saturation with water or other liquids such as commercial kitchens.
Floor boxes shall be suitable for use in air handling spaces in accordance with
Section 300-22(c) of the National Electrical Code.
3. MATERIALS
RC7AFFTC Flush Furniture Feed Poke-Thru Assembly for power: Consists of an
insert and activation cover. Overall poke-thru assembly length shall be 16-1/2 in.
[419mm].
1) Insert: Insert body shall have the necessary channels to provide complete
separation of power and communication services. There shall be one (1) 3/4-
inch trade size channel for power and two (2) 1/2-inch trade size channels for
communication cabling. The channels shall be arranged such that
communication cables can be conduit protected and connected to the insert
body using a die-cast zinc conduit connector with two (2) 1/2-inch trade size
threaded openings to accept both rigid and flexible conduit connections.
a) The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the
fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely
in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain
the fire rating of the unit and the floor slab. Insert shall have a spring-steel
retaining ring that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without
additional fasteners. The poke-thru insert shall also consist of one (1) 3/4-
inch trade size conduit stub and one 1-1/2-inch trade size conduit stub that
are connected to the insert body. There shall also be a 24.5 cu in [402ml]
stamped steel junction box for wire splices and connections. The stamped
steel junction box shall also contain the necessary means to electrically
ground the poke-thru assembly.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 27 of 145
2) Activation Cover: The activation cover shall provide three (3) conduit
openings to feed modular furniture applications and provide a flush
appearance. The activation cover trim flange shall be one-piece and be
manufactured of forged aluminum alloy and be capable of being powder
coated or plated. Coated finish is to be textured, two-stage epoxy paint in
gray or black. Activation cover trim flange shall also be available in a solid
brass forging and a die cast brushed aluminum finish. Aluminum and brass
finish shall be a brushed finish with a lacquer sealant. The activation cover
shall be seven (7) inches [178mm] in diameter. A gasket is attached to the
underside of the trim flange assembly to maintain scrub water tightness by
preventing water, dirt, and dust from entering the power and communication
compartments.
a) The activation cover insert shall provide one (1) 3/4-inch NPSM threaded
opening for power and two (2) 1/2-inch NPSM threaded openings for
communication to feed modular furniture workstations. Each activation
cover shall also be supplied with one (1) 3/4-inch trade size and two (2)
1/2-inch trade size threaded conduit connectors and one (1) 3/4-inch trade
size and one (1) 3/4-inch trade size and two (2) 1/2-inch trade size conduit
closure plugs.
RC9AM2TC Furniture Feed Poke-Thru Assembly for data: Consists of an insert and
activation cover. Overall poke-thru assembly length shall be 10 inches [254mm].
1) Insert: There shall be one (1) 2-inch trade size channel for all power or all
communication cabling. The body will also consist of an intumescent fire stop
material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material
will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be
adjusted to maintain the fire rating of the unit and the floor slab. Insert shall
have a spring-steel retaining ring that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor
slab without additional fasteners.
2) Activation Cover: The activation cover shall be manufactured of aluminum
die-cast alloy and consist of a trim flange and a hexagonal service head. The
activation cover shall be capable of being powder coated or plated. Finish
shall be textured, two-stage epoxy paint available in a gray or black finish. A
gasket is attached to the underside of the activation cover trim flange to
maintain scrub water tightness. Trim flange shall have a combination 1-1/4
in. - 2 in. trade size conduit opening and closure plugs. The trim flange shall
be seven (7) inches [178mm] in diameter. All power connections must be
made in a junction box below (not supplied).
I. Cleaning and Protection
1. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Protect boxes and fittings until acceptance.
WIRING DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
Cooper Wiring Devices.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 28 of 145
B. Straight Blade Receptacles:
1. Duplex Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration NEMA5-20R,
UL 498 and FS W-C-596. Specification grade industrial series, straight-blade, 2 pole 3 wire
grounding type, back and side wired, nylon face, rated for 120 volts, 20 amperes. Hubbell
No.5362 or equal. Hubbell No.5362WR or equal for weather-resistant listed receptacles.
Receptacles that are controlled by an automatic control device shall be marked per NEC
with the international power symbol. Provide as indicated on the drawings with one
controlled face and split circuit hot tab equal to Hubbell BR20C1 series.
2. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles: Duplex receptacles conforming to UL 943,
specification grade heavy duty, feed-through type, rated for 120 volt, 20 amperes, NEMA
5-20R, GFI Class "A" with a sensitivity to leakage 5 milliamps, weather-resistant and
tamper-resistant listed. Hubbell No. GF20LA or equal.
3. Transient-Voltage Surge-Suppressor (TVSS) Receptacles: Duplex type, NEMA 5-20R
configuration, with integral transient-voltage surge protection in a minimum of 3 modes:
line-to-ground, line-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground; listed as complying with UL 1449.
Hubbell HBL5362SA or equal.
4. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Specification grade, straight-
blade, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Listed as tamper-resistant with “T” marking.
Hubbell BR20TR or equal.
5. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Straight blade; equipment
grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device,
with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Hubbell CR 5253IG or equal.
6. Duplex Receptacles with Integral USB jacks, 125 V, 20 A: Specification grade, straight-
blade, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. “USB” marking indicates USB receptacle
duplex grounding type NEMA 5-20R equal to Hubbell MX20X2 or equal
C. All standard 15 and 20 ampere, 125 and 250 volt non-locking type receptacles located 5 ft.-6 in.
or below within Auditorium, Gymnasium, Pre-schools and elementary school age classrooms,
medical clinic areas, dental offices and any other areas that are listed in NEC 406.12 shall be
tamper resistant type receptacles whether indicated or not by the “T” marking on the drawings.
D. Exterior Outlets with Lockable Covers:
1. Provide exterior outlets with lockable covers at all exterior outlet locations. Provide GFCI
Circuit Breakers on all branch circuits. Provide in-use weatherproof locking covers.
E. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles:
1. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL
1010.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
2) Appleton Electric.
3) Hubbell.
4) KH Industries.
F. Twist-Locking Receptacles:
1. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V and 250 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD6 and UL 498. Hubbell HBL2310 (L5-20R), HBL2320 (L6-20R), or equal.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 29 of 145
G. Cord Reels
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Hubbell.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
Appleton Electric.
KH Industries.
2. Industrial grade retractable power cord reel with the following features:
Cast Aluminum construction, including mounting base
12 position adjustable guide arm
Adjustable ratchet can be engaged (positive lock) or disengaged (constant tension)
as needed
Adjustable ball stop
6 ft. Feeder Cord included
White powder-coat finish
Universal mounting overhead, wall or detached from bracket completely.
Adjustable cable stop.
Voltage 125 VAC
Slip Ring Rating 600V/30A
Payout End Blk Duplex/Duplex Outlet Box
Feeder End 5-20P
Max. Amperage 20 Amps
Gauge/Conductor 12/3
Cord Length 25 Feet
Mounting Bracket with 340 deg. pivot base.
Cord Type/Color SJO/White Cord Reel
Color White
Hubbell Model#HBLI25123GF220M1 or equal.
3. For WP Cord Reel provide as follows:
Hubbell Model#HBLW25123 or equal.
Hubbell Model#HBLPOB1 receptacle enclosure
Install two duplex receptacles in receptacle enclosure.
Provide GFCI type circuit breaker for all WP Cord Reels
H. Snap Switches:
1. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
2. Switches, heavy duty, side wired, 120/277V, 20A:
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way).
Hubbell; C1221 (single pole), C1222 (two pole), C1223 (three way).
Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way).
Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way).
I. Securely fasten wiring devices in place, plumb, level, and true to finished lines and surfaces.
J. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
K. Provide gaskets on all wiring device plates where devices are on walls separating conditioned
and non-conditioned spaces and exterior walls.
L. Composition material of wiring devices to be nylon with ivory finish. Outlets intended for computer
use shall be grey finish, outlets on emergency shall be red finish.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 30 of 145
M. Wall Plates:
1. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: Satin-finished Type 302 stainless steel.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in "wet locations."
2. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum.
N. Poke-Through Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold
O. Finishes:
1. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers as specified do not designate device color.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect,
unless otherwise indicated or required by referenced Electrical Code or device
listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General
1. Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures:
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing luminaires and drivers. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. Arrange data for
luminaires in the order of fixture designation.
Performance Curves/Data:
1) Submit certified photometric data for each type of luminaire.
2) Submit supply-air, return-air, heat-removal, and sound performance data for
air handling luminaires.
Drawings: Submit shop drawings for non-standard luminaires.
Calculations: Submit as requested to support equal product proposals.
Warranty: Submit warranties for luminaires and for electronic ballasts.
2. All LED sources, drivers, and controls shall meet the latest utility company incentive
requirements. Refer to the latest program requirements documentation and coordinate with
the utility company to ensure compliance. All fixtures shall be DLC lister or energy star
compliant.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Massachusetts Building Code
(MBC) for components and installation.
2. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL)
for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.
3. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts
similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service
performance.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 31 of 145
4. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.
C. LED Assemblies
1. LED luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 and to UL 8250 – Safety Standard for Light-
Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products.
2. Products shall be lead and mercury free.
3. Photometric characteristics shall be established using IESNA LM-79-08, IESNA Approved
Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products.
4. Color characteristics of LED luminaires shall be as follows in accordance with ANSI
C78.377 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products.
5. LED and driver cooling system shall be passive and shall resist the buildup of debris.
6. LED luminaire output after 50,000 hours of operation shall be not less than 70 percent of
the initial lumen output when determined in accordance with IESNA LM-80-08 – IESNA
approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting Sources.
7. LED source package electrical characteristics:
Supply voltage: 120 V, 208 V, 240 V, 277 V, or 480 V as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide step-down transformers if required to match driver input voltage rating.
Total harmonic distortion (current): Not more than 10 percent
Power factor: Not less than 90 percent
RF interference: Meet FCC 47 CFR Part 15/18
Transient protection: IEEE C62.41 Class A.
8. All LED Assemblies shall be provided by Osram, Phillips, GE, or equal.
D. Extra Materials
1. Furnish the following extra materials matching products installed. Package with protective
covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents.
LED drivers of each type provide two of each type.
Ten percent of each type of single faced exit signs, but no fewer than ten. Include
100 ft. of type MC cable branch circuiting and installation labor.
Ten percent of each type of double faced exit signs, but no fewer than five. Include
100 ft. of type MC cable branch circuiting and installation labor.
E. Interior General:
1. Furnish interior luminaries that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the
Drawings to meet conditions of installation.
2. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
3. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.
4. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer's standard finish applied over a corrosion-
resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains, holidays or defects.
5. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating
conditions. Relamping shall be possible without the use of tools. Doors, frames, lenses
and diffusers shall be designed to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when
secured in the operating position.
6. Luminaires shall have minimum reflecting surface reflectance as follows unless specified
otherwise on the Drawings:
White Surfaces: 85 percent
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent
7. Lenses, diffusers, covers and globes shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic unless specified
otherwise on the Drawings. Lenses shall have 0.125 inch minimum thickness. Lenses for
troffers shall be injection molded.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 32 of 145
8. Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 - Luminaires. Provide product with damp location
listing or wet location listing by installation location.
All finishes shall be selected by the Architect prior to release of fixture. Architect shall
select from standard available finishes available for each fixture. White and black
are considered standard finishes and shall be provided at no additional cost for all
fixtures.
F. Interior Accessories
1. Provide stud supports, mounting brackets, frames, plaster rings and other accessories
required for luminaire installation.
2. Furnish hangers as specified below by conditions of installation:
Stem hangers shall be made of 1/2-inch steel tubing with 45 degrees swivel ball
hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.
Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4 inch threaded zinc-plated steel rod.
3. Use NRTL-listed T-bar safety clips for lay-in luminaires.
G. Interior Installation
1. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's installation
instructions, approved shop drawings, and NECA National Electrical Installation
Standards.
2. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.
3. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire
for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-mounted fixtures.
4. Where the ceiling forms the protective membrane of a fire resistive assembly, install
protective coverings over luminaires in accordance with NRTL requirements.
5. Install slack safety wires as described below for luminaires in or on suspended ceilings.
Wire shall be minimum 12 gage galvanized soft annealed steel wire conforming to
ASTM A641.
Attach wire to the building structure directly above the attachment point on the box
or luminaire; make trapezes of framing channel material to span obstacles
Secure wire(s) at each end with not less than three tight turns in 1-1/2 inch.
6. Support pendant-mounted or cable-supported luminaires directly from the structure above
using a 9 gage wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension
system for direct support.
Install seismic restraints for pendant-mounted and cable-supported luminaires.
Pendants, rods, cables, or chains 4 ft or longer shall be braced to prevent swaying
using three cables at 120 degrees separation.
7. Connect luminaires in suspended ceilings using 6 ft. lengths of flexible wiring method
arranged accommodate not lea than 4 inch of differential seismic movement in any
direction.
H. Interior Quality Control
1. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps,
energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA National Electrical Installation
Standards:
2. Test electronic dimming ballasts for full range dimming capability.
Check for visually detectable flicker over the full dimming range.
3. Prior to turnover to Owner, replace lamps that were installed and used during construction
if more than 15 percent of their rated lamp life has been used.
I. Exterior - General
1. Furnish exterior luminaires that comply with requirements specified in this Section and in
the luminaire schedule on the Drawings.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 33 of 145
2. Luminaire photometric characteristics shall be based on IESNA approved methods for
photometric measurements performed by a recognized photometric laboratory.
3. Luminaire housing shall be primarily metal.
Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Sheet metal components shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant aluminum,
formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.
Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.
4. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating
conditions.
Relamping shall be possible without the use of special tools.
Doors, frames, lenses and diffusers shall be designed to prevent accidental falling
during relamping and when secured in the operating position.
Door shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lens.
5. Luminaires shall have minimum reflecting surface reflectance as follows unless scheduled
otherwise:
White surfaces: 85 percent
Specular surfaces: 83 percent
Diffusing specular surfaces: 75 percent
6. Provide lenses, diffusers, covers and globes as scheduled on the Drawings fabricated from
materials that are UV stabilized to be resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging
or exposure to heat and ultraviolet radiation.
7. Doors shall have resilient gaskets that are heat-resistant and aging-resistant to seal and
cushion lens and refractor.
J. Exterior Poles and Accessories
1. Furnish poles and accessories that comply with requirements specified in this Section and
the luminaire schedule on the Drawings.
2. Pole, base, and anchorage shall carry the luminaires, supports, and appurtenances at the
indicated height above grade without deflection or whipping.
3. Mountings, fastenings and other appurtenances shall be fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials that are compatible with poles and luminaires and will not cause
galvanic action at contact points. Mountings shall correctly position luminaires to provide
scheduled light distribution.
4. A reinforced access handhole shall be located in the wall of each metal pole.
5. A welded 1/2 inch grounding lug shall be accessible through the handhole of each metal
pole. Grounding connection shall be designed to prevent electrolysis when used with
copper ground wire.
6. Metal poles shall have anchor type bases and galvanized steel anchor bolts and leveling
nuts.
7. Metal poles shall have a metal base cover that covers the entire base plate and anchorage.
8. Protect painted, anodized, or brushed pole finishes during shipment and installation.
Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper
secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.
9. Aluminum poles shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant aluminum Alloy 6063-T6 or
Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys or Alloy 356-T4 for cast alloys.
Poles shall be square or round, tapered or straight as indicated on the Drawings.
Aluminum poles over 30 feet tall shall include factory-installed vibration dampers.
Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch
wall thickness.
Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover.
Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in
accordance with ASTM B 108/B 108M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy
Permanent Mold Castings and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft.
Joint between shaft and base shall be welded.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 34 of 145
Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or
stainless steel.
10. The poles EPA capacity shall meet the wind rating in the geographical area in which its
installed. Refer to AASHTO wind map and provide appropriate wind rating with the paired
light fixture. Wind rating shall be a minimum of 100MPH with 130MPH gust rating.
11. Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. The top 12
inch of the anchor bolt shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
12. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as scheduled
or specified on the Drawings.
13. Fuses and Fuse holders
Furnish fuse overcurrent protection for each pole-mounted luminaire to isolate
faulted ballasts from the lighting circuit.
Use 600 volt, Class CC, time-delay, current-limiting fuses.
Select fuses rated between 200 percent and 300 percent of the luminaire ballast or
driver maximum current.
Manufacturer: Bussman “LP-CC” or approved equal.
14. Furnish in-line fuse holders for installation in pole hand hole or transformer base.
Use non-breakaway type fuse holders unless breakaway poles are indicated on the
Drawings.
Use breakaway type fuse holders where breakaway poles are indicated on the
Drawings.
Load and line terminal sizes and types shall correspond to line and load conductor
sizes and quantities.
Both breakaway and non-breakaway fuse holders shall have insulating boots.
Manufacturers: Ferraz Shawmut “FEC” for phase conductor(s), “FEBN” for neutral
conductor, or approved equal.
K. Exterior Installation
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA/IESNA 501, and
approved shop drawings.
2. Locations of luminaires and poles shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate
luminaire locations with building finishes, building structure, paving and striping, utility
piping, security fences, and existing trees. Obtain approval for location changes through
LANL Subcontract Technical Representative (STR).
3. Set poles and luminaires plumb, square, level and secure.
4. Install surface mounted luminaires directly to an outlet box which is supported from
structure.
5. Install in-grade luminaires flush with surrounding surface. Coordinate pitch or grading of
surface with Construction Manager to allow drainage away from fixture.
6. Install lamps in luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
7. Pre-cast Concrete Foundations:
Concrete shall be a minimum of 5,000 psi after 28 days.
Electrical SubContractor shall coordinate conduit requirements, anchor bolt pattern,
bolt projection, and approved light pole base including bolt covers with approved
light pole prior to release of pre-cast base.
Base shape shall match pole shape and shall be a minimum of 18 in. or 2 in. larger
than pole base bolt covers.
Comply with details on electrical drawings for dimensions, reveal above grade, and
reinforcing.
Provide Shea concrete products or equal.
8. Pole Erection
Do not install poles without luminaires.
Use fabric web slings to raise and set poles.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 35 of 145
Use leveling nuts or shims to make poles plumb. When leveling nuts are used, set
the lower nuts not more than 1 inch from the concrete foundation.
Tighten anchor bolt nuts and other pole hardware to torque recommended by
manufacturer.
After pole is leveled, pack non-shrink grout between anchor base and concrete
foundation to provide a full bearing surface. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch diameter
pipe to make a drain hole through grout; arrange to drain condensation from interior
of pole.
Set embedded poles to depth indicated on the Drawings, but not less than 1/6 of
pole length below finish grade.
Auger holes large enough to permit the use of tampers the full depth of the hole.
Backfill in 6 inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is
equal to or greater than that of the undisturbed earth.
ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT
A. Motor Controls - Manual and Solid State:
1. Individually mounted starters shall be NEMA rated solid state type with thermal overload
on each reduced voltage start.
2. Motor Starters shall be furnished by Electrical Sub-Contractor unless part of package
mechanical equipment such as rooftop units. Refer to equipment schedules on Electrical
Plans and provide accordingly.
3. The solid state motor controller shall use silicon controlled rectifiers (SCR’s) to control the
voltage to the motor windings. Two SCR’s shall be used in a back-to-back arrangement in
each phase to allow alternating current to pass to the motor. When SCR triggering is
delayed, the voltage to the load shall be reduced. This phase-controlled operation provides
soft starting with stelpless acceleration. Once the motor is running, voltage reduction can
improve the motor’s operating point at partial load, saving energy and lowering the reactive
current. If one or more shorted SCRs are detected, the starter shall not energize. A fault
LED will light and if provided with a shunt trip, the main circuit breaker will trip. Provide
pump stop option to eliminate water hammer in pumping systems, by giving a controlled
decel to the motor voltage. This process shall allow for smooth pressure reduction and
quiet check valve operation. The controller shall trip off the line if one or more phases is
lost.
4. Starters shall be of size and type required for particular motor horsepower and voltage.
Minimum size starter to be size 1 FVNR, unless noted otherwise.
Starters shall have OL reset button, green push-to-test type pilot light to indicate
"ON", and "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch in cover.
Starters to have 120 volt control transformers with fused output being provided for
those units operating on 277/480 volt system.
Provide Class 20 fixed heater overloads with auto/manual reset.
Provide four sets of auxiliary contacts of convertible type N.O. to N.C. for each
starter.
Motor starters shall have NEMA I enclosures. Those in wet locations shall be NEMA
3R.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Westinghouse/Culter-Hammer
2) Square D/Groupe Schneider
3) Siemens
4) Allen Bradley
5) General Electric
6) Or equal
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 36 of 145
5. Manual motor starters shall have pilot lights and shall be furnished with thermal overloads
on each phase.
B. Motors: Each motor shall have disconnect switch and starter provided under this section.
1. Provide motor terminal boxes for each motor not furnished with same.
C. Disconnect Switches:
1. Disconnect (safety) switches shall conform to industrial standards of NEMA, be UL listed
and shall be heavy duty type, quick-make, quick-break type with interlocking cover
mechanism and provisions for padlocking switch handle in "OFF" position. Three pole
toggle switches are not acceptable as substitute for disconnect switches.
2. Disconnect switches shall be of fused or unfused type as indicated with number of
disconnecting poles indicated. The grounded conductor shall not be switched. Switches
for use with current limiting fuses shall be rejection type and those used in conjunction with
motors shall be horsepower rated. Provide oversize termination lugs if required by
conductor size.
3. Enclosures shall be of proper NEMA type for intended location and shall be phosphate
coated or equivalent code gauge galvanized sheet steel with ANSI #24 dark gray baked
enamel finish.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Culter-Hammer/Westinghouse
Square D/Groupe Schneider
Siemens
Allen Bradley
General Electric
Or equal
D. Fuses:
1. Secondary system fuses, rated at 600 volts or less, shall be UL listed and constructed in
conformance with the applicable standards set forth by NEMA and ANSI. All fuses of a
particular class shall be of same manufacturer.
2. All fuses in distribution panelboards and switchboards shall be class "L" above 600
amperes and class "RK1" for 600 amperes and below.
3. Main, Feeder, and Branch Circuits:
Circuits 601 amperes and above shall be protected by (Bussmann type KRP-C
LOW-PEAK) current limiting time delay fuses.
Circuits 0-600 amperes shall be protected by (Bussmann "LOW-PEAK" dual
element), time delay current limiting fuses, LPN-RK (250 volts), LPS-RK (600 volts),
UL class RK-1.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Bussmann, Division of McGraw
Gould/Shawmut
GEC-ALSTHOM
Or equal
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Provide a complete power system consisting of branch circuits, motor disconnect switches,
pushbutton stations, motor starters, and other devices to connect up and leave in operating
condition each piece of electrically operated equipment provided either under this section or other
Divisions.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 37 of 145
B. All control wiring, not indicated in the electrical specifications or not shown on electrical drawings,
will be provided by Temperature Control Subcontractor.
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. All equipment and systems shall be grounded. Refer especially to NEC Section 250 Requiring
Connections to Building Steel, Foundation, Water Service, and Interior Piping. Provide
transformer pad grounding in accordance with utility company standards.
B. The grounded conductor shall be supplemented by an equipment grounding system.
C. The equipment grounding system shall be installed so all conductive items in close proximity to
electrical circuits operate continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for
ground fault currents.
D. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortest and most direct path to ground.
E. Maximum measured resistance to ground of 5.0 ohms shall not be exceeded. Ground separately
derived systems (dry type transformers) in accordance with Article 250-30 by grounding neutral
to transformer ground lug and providing insulated grounding electrode conductor to nearest
effectively grounded building steel or, if unavailable, to nearest available effectively grounded
metal water pipe.
F. Equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in compliance with Code Table 250-
122.
G. Grounding conductors shall be insulated with green color. Grounding conductors for use on
isolated ground receptacles shall be green with trace color to differentiate between normal ground
conductors.
H. Branch circuits shall consist of phase and grounded conductor installed in common metallic
raceway. All receptacle circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. All circuits shall have a separate
insulated grounding conductor installed. Any flexible cable system or non-metallic raceway
system shall have an insulated grounding conductor. Any cable system for use on isolated
ground circuits shall have both an isolated ground conductor as well as an equipment ground
conductor, both of which shall be insulated.
I. Each electrical expansion fitting shall be furnished with a bonding jumper. Provide grounding
bushings and ground connections for all raceways terminating below equipment where there is
no metal-to-metal continuity.
J. Continuity between all metallic and nonmetallic raceway systems and equipment shall be
maintained.
K. Outdoor lighting fixtures shall be grounded and bonded in common with building system via a
separate grounding conductor.
L. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 38 of 145
M. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
N. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops at least 6 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade.
O. Dry type transformer: Install an insulated grounding conductor from a transformer neutral to the
building steel by means of copper wire, as scheduled on the drawings.
P. Refer to Technology Specifications for additional grounding requirements.
Q. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit, from
a grounding bus of the building's main service equipment to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
MAIN BUILDING SWITCHBOARD
A. Main building switchboard shall be constructed in accordance with UL 891 and ANSI standards
and of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed rigid
structure. The sides, top, and rear shall be covered with removable plates. Switchboard shall
include all protective services and equipment as listed on drawings with necessary
interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. Buses shall be copper. Provide oversize
termination lugs for any terminations requiring same due to conductor sizing.
B. Record drawings shall be furnished with the following: Complete rating, short-circuit
withstandability of bus and of lowest rated device, overall outline dimensions, including space
available for raceways, circuit schedule showing circuit number, device description, device fuse
clip ampere rating, conductor ratings and one-line diagram with each circuit device numbered.
C. Each section shall be 90 in. high, self-supported, and same depth as incoming line section,
approximately 30 in. deep. Main protective device shall be individually mounted with front
coverplate and bus connection straps. Where called for on schedule, "space" shall mean to
include necessary bus, supports, and connections, leaving out only the breaker itself. Bus
structure shall be arranged to permit future additions.
D. Switchboard shall be arranged for operation as follows:
1. Voltage - 480Y/277 volts
2. Frequency - 60 cycles
3. Service - 3 phase, 4 wire, ampere capacity as indicated on drawings.
4. Neutral - full capacity
5. Available short circuit current at line terminals - 65,000 RMS amperes symmetrical.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 39 of 145
6. Integrated equipment rating - 65,000 AIC
7. Copper ground bus, full length
8. UL service entrance label
E. Provide electrical metering and voltage protection system equal to Square D, Westinghouse IQ
Data Plus or Siemens 4700 Series at main breaker.
1. Main service entrance device shall be an insulated-case circuit breaker (ICCB): Rating as
shown on drawings, 100 percent rated, sealed circuit breaker with interrupting capacity
rating to meet available fault current.
2. Fixed circuit-breaker mounting.
3. Two-step, stored-energy closing.
4. Microprocessor-based trip unit with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators, and the
following field-adjustable settings:
5. Instantaneous trip.
6. Long- and short-time time pick-up and time delay adjustments.
7. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
8. Safety features: Phase loss protection.
9. Provide maintenance mode arc flash reduction feature on main circuit breaker.
F. Switchboard feeder protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers. The circuit breakers
250 amperes and larger shall be with a solid-state trip, all other circuit breakers shall be of
thermal-magnetic type. Breakers shall be built, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL 489.
G. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with field-replaceable rating plug and the following field-
adjustable settings:
4. Instantaneous trip.
5. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
6. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
7. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
9. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
10. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
11. Application Listing: Type HACR for heating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment
power feeders.
12. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, where shown on the drawings.
H. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer
2. Square D/Groupe Schneider
3. Siemens
4. General Electric/ABB
5. Or equal
PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be dead-front, door in door safety type equipped with single or multi-pole circuit
breakers suitable for 120/208 volt or 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire operation.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 40 of 145
B. Buses shall be copper. Panelboards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a frame with
plastic cover on inside of door. Panelboards to have a copper ground bus with terminals for each
circuit. Panelboards serving isolated ground receptacles shall have a separate ground bus for
terminations of the isolated grounds. The isolated ground bus shall be mounted to the panel tub
via non-conducting means with a separate grounding conductor run to the normal panel ground
bus. Provide oversize lugs for any termination requiring same due to oversize conductors.
Provide 200 percent neutral buses on all 120/208 volt panelboards.
C. Cabinets shall be minimum of 20 inches wide and be made of code gauge steel. Surface type
shall be ordered without knockouts.
D. Trims shall be made of code gauge steel, surface or flush as indicated. Panelboards shall be
keyed alike. Trims shall be provided with full length piano hinge on one side, and secured to tub
with sufficient quantity of latches opposite the hinge side to allow trim to fit flush with tub and
when released, allow full access to wiring gutters. Inner door shall allow access to circuit breakers
only.
E. Panelboards shall be of the following types with minimum circuit breaker frame sizes listed below.
Refer to schedules for larger circuit breaker frame sizes due to fault current availability.
1. 120/208 volt, three phase, four wire. Symmetrical interrupting capacity 10,000 AIC.
Style
Eaton type PRL-1 BAB Breakers
(bolt-on)
Square D type NQOD QOB Breakers
(bolt-on)
Siemens type CDP-7 BQ Breakers
(bolt-on)
General Electric Type AQ HHQB Breakers
(bolt-on)
2. 277/480 volt, three phase, four wire. Symmetrical interrupting capacity 65,000 AIC.
Style
Eaton type PRL-2 GHB Breakers
(bolt-on)
Square D type NEHB EHB Breakers
(bolt-on)
Siemens type CDP-7 BQCH Breakers
(bolt-on)
General Electric Type AE TEY Breakers
(bold-on)
3. Distribution Panels:
Where scheduled as circuit breaker type, symmetrical interrupting capacity 65,000
AIC.
Eaton type PRL-3 FD Breakers
Square D I-Line type FA Breakers
Siemens SPP FXD6 Breakers
General Electrical Spectra THED Breakers
Or equal
F. Panelboards and distribution panels shall be of same manufacturer as switchboard. Refer to
drawings where higher interrupting are required.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 41 of 145
G. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
for circuit-breaker frame sizes 150 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
4. Instantaneous trip.
5. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
6. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
7. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
8. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (5-mA trip).
9. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
10. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,
single-pole configuration.
H. All power panels fed from K-13 transformers shall have surge protection. Coordination and Arc
flash study shall be submitted with shop drawing submittal. All circuit breaker selection shall meet
study recommendations and shall be provided as recommended by study.
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformer Specification:
1. Compatibility: This product must facilitate the ability of the electrical system to supply a
sinusoidal voltage in order to improve the long-term compatibility of the electrical system
with all types of linear and nonlinear connected loads today and in the future. All national
and international standards on harmonics and power quality set limits on levels of voltage
distortion to maintain compatibility.
2. Alluminum-wound, 3-phase, common core, ventilated, dry-type, isolation transformer built
to NEMA ST20 and relevant NEMA, UL and IEEE standards; 200 percent rated neutral;
60Hz rated; Transformers 750 kVA and less, 600 volt primary and less, shall be U.L. and
CSA Listed and bear the label. All terminals, including those for changing taps, must be
readily accessible by removing a front cover plate. Windings shall be continuous with
terminations brazed or welded. 10kV BIL.
3. Insulation System:
Shall be NOMEX-based with an Epoxy Co-polymer impregnant for lowest
environmental impact, long term reliability and long life expectancy
Class: 220 degrees C
Impregnant Properties for low emissions during manufacturing, highest reliability
and life expectancy
Epoxy co-polymer
VOC: less than 1.65 lbs/gal (low emissions during manufacturing)
Water absorption (24hrs at 25C): less than 0.05 percent (superior insulation, longer
life)
Chemical Resistance: Must have documented excellent performance rating by
supplier
Dielectric Strength: minimum of 3200 volts/mil dry (for superior stress, overvoltage
tolerance)
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 42 of 145
Dissipation Factor: max. 0.02 at 25C to reduce aging of insulation, extending useful
life
4. Operating Temperature Rise: 150 degrees C in a 40 degree C maximum ambient
5. Noise levels:
Per NEMA ST-20
Production Test every unit. Data to be available upon request.
6. UL Listed & Labeled K-Rating: K-7 or higher
7. Maximum No Load Losses
Transformers are energized 24 hours a day for their entire life, potentially 40 years
or more. These losses are incurred whether the transformer is loaded or not, and
cost the user many times the purchase price of the transformer even at current
energy rates.
No load losses shall not exceed: 15kVA: 60W, 30kVA: 99W, 45kVA: 130W, 75kVA:
180W, 112.5kVA: 260W, 150kVA: 330W, 225kVA: 450W, 300kVA: 560W, 500kVA:
850W
8. DOE 10 CFR Part 430 CSL 3 Efficiency requirement, tested per NEMA TP-2:
Shall meet or exceed: 15kVA: 97.6 percent, 30kVA: 98.1 percent, 45kVA: 98.3
percent, 75kVA: 98.6 percent, 112.5kVA: 98.8 percent, 150kVA: 98.9 percent,
225kVA: 98.9 percent, 300kVA: 99.0 percent, 500kVA: 99.1 percent, 750kVA: 99.2
percent
9. Voltage Taps: For transformers 30kVA-300kVA, provide two 2-1/2 percent full capacity
taps above and below nominal primary voltage. For transformers 15kVA and smaller as
well as 500kVA and larger provide one 5 percent full capacity tap above and below nominal
primary voltage.
10. Impedance: Between 3.5 percent and 5.8 percent unless otherwise noted.
11. Enclosure type: Ventilated NEMA 2, drip-proof [optional NEMA 3R]
12. Maximum Footprint for 150 degree C rise model in a NEMA 1 enclosure:
17 in. Wide x 17 in. Deep x 27 in. High for 15kVA.
26 in. Wide x 18 in. Deep x 30 in. High for 30kVA, 45kVA
33 in. Wide x 22 in. Deep x 40 in. High for 75kVA, 112.5kVA
38 in. Wide x 28 in. Deep x 52 in. High for 150kVA
38 in. Wide x 32 in. Deep x 52 in. High for 225kVA, 300kVA
52 in. Wide x 38 in. Deep x 61 in. High for 500kVA
63 in. Wide x 46 in. Deep x 67 in. High for 750kVA
B. Acceptable Manufacturers or Approved Equal: Square D is the Basis of Design.
1. Square D Company
2. Powersmiths International Corp.
3. Eaton
4. Or Equal
ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Coordinate and cooperate with Eversource, hereinafter called utility company, with respect to
providing service and metering.
B. Provide all system raceways, manholes, elbows, pull wires, and all grounding. Utility company
will provide pad mounted transformer and primary conductors including making up of all
terminations and connections.
C. Provide secondary service complete including all conductors, raceways, and connectors at
transformer. Provide oversize lugs if required due to conductor sizing. Attachment of secondary
conductors to the transformer terminals will be done by The E.C.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 43 of 145
D. All work to be done in accordance with utility company standards.
E. Metering: All usage will be on one secondary meter. Utility Company will furnish current
transformers and potential transformers to in cold sequence in CT cabinet after the main circuit
breaker. Meter socket and meter will be provided by Utility Company. Meters shall be ordered
with KYZ Pulse output for connection to Building Management System.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM WITH MASS NOTIFICATION (Voice Evacuation
Required)
A. Description:
1. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing
of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm and Mass Notification
equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but
not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, Local operator Controls, annunciators, Smoke
Control Graphic Panel and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
2. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of latest NFPA Standard 72 for
Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this
specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all
conductors.
3. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and insist on the highest quality.
The system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the
requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994.
4. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100 percent by a single U.S.
manufacturer (or division thereof).
5. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the
appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in
compliance with the UL listing.
6. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and trouble
signals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated personnel in other buildings at
the site via a multiplex communication
7. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)
technicians on site to guide the final check-out and to ensure the systems integrity.
B. Scope:
1. An intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled Fire detection, Smoke Control and Mass
Notification system shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
2. Basic Performance:
Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be
encoded onto NFPA Style 7 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D).
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z).
Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling.
Power for initiating devices and notification appliances must be from the main fire
alarm control panel, the transponder to which they are connected or to a Field
Charging Power Supply (FCPS).
A single ground or open on any system signaling line circuit, initiating device circuit,
or notification appliance circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating
power or the ability to report an alarm.
Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure
(or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 44 of 145
3. Basic System Functional Operation: When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported
by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall
immediately occur:
The FACP alarm LED on the FACP shall flash.
A local piezo-electric signal in the FACP control panel shall sound.
The 80-character LCD display on the local FACP node and on the intelligent network
display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition,
including the type of alarm point, and its location within the protected premises. This
information shall also be displayed on the network reporting terminal.
Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with the
fire alarm control panel condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.
All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to
be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated
system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated on
either local outputs or points located on other network nodes.
4. Software Modifications:
Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all
system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the
technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to
modify the fire alarm network on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of
devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes
for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the
type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not
require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while
modifications are being made.
5. Certifications:
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of installation and
the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of
the major equipment manufacturer and trained on network applications. Include
names and addresses in the certification.
C. Applicable Publications:
1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are
referenced in text by the basic designation only.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
1) No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code
2) No. 70 National Electric Code
3) No. 101 Life Safety Code
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:
1) No. 50 Cabinets and Boxes
2) No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling System
3) No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
4) No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
5) No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
6) No. 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
7) No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
8) No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
9) No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
10) No. 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
11) No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling
Systems
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 45 of 145
12) No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
Local and State Building Codes.
All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
D. Approvals:
1. The system must have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally
recognized agencies:
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
FM Factory Mutual
MEA Material Equipment Acceptance (NYC)
CSFM California State Fire Marshal
2. The fire alarm control panel, shall meet the modular labeling requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Each subassembly, including all printed circuits, shall include the
appropriate UL modular label. Systems which do not include modular labels which may
require return to the manufacturer for system upgrades, and are not acceptable.
E. Equipment and Material - General:
1. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling
(fire alarm) system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of
the complete system.
2. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each
manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all
wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes. before beginning system
installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific system
installation/termination/wiring data.
3. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place. (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
4. All fire alarm equipment that requires keys shall be keyed alike.
F. Conduit and Wire:
1. Conduit:
Conduit shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), local and
state requirements.
All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway where exposed. Conduit fill shall
not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables
are contained within a single conduit.
Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits,
and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these
conductors, per NEC Article 760-29.
Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar
power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and
signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression
devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all
circuits without interference or loss of signals.
Conduit shall not enter any FACP, or any other remotely mounted control panel
equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP
manufacturer.
Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum.
Fire alarm low energy plenum rated cable is acceptable for fire alarm for concealed
locations where allowed by code and not subject to damage.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 46 of 145
2. Wire:
All fire alarm system wiring must be new, unless specified herein.
Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article
760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number
and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system
manufacturer, but not less than 16 AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and
signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG (1.32 mm) for notification appliance circuits.
All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency
for use with a protective signaling system.
Wiring used for the SLC multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded
unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer.
All field wiring shall be completely supervised.
3. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed
for the intended purpose.
4. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow).
Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected
to intelligent reporting devices.
5. The FACP shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM
and contain a breaker lock. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG.
The FACP cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.
6. Submittals
Submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the
Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's
Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these Specifications.
Submittals shall be prepared by a NICET level III and reviewed signed and dated by
a NICET IV.
Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to start of system installation, submit Shop
Drawings to and obtain written approval from the Fire Department, prior to ordering
fire alarm equipment. General requirements are as follows:
1) Submittal of fire rated sealant for penetrations.
2) A complete point to point riser diagram of the fire alarm system. (Typical riser
diagrams are not acceptable).
3) A complete point to point installation diagram. (Typical installation diagrams
are not acceptable).
4) A complete list of current drain requirements during normal supervisory,
trouble, and alarm condition.
5) Battery standby calculations showing total standby power required to meet
the specified system requirements.
6) Supplier’s qualifications indicating years in business, service policies,
warranty definitions, and list of similar installations.
7) Electrical Subcontractor qualifications, indicating years in business, prior
experience with installations that include the type of equipment that is to be
supplied, and installers license number and type of license.
8) Circuit calculations for all Notification Appliance Circuits. Calculations shall
conform to UL864 10th edition and shall be performed using 19vdc starting
voltage with a drop allowance to minimum nameplate voltage for the devices
on each circuit.
9) Amplifiers shall be calculated based on the following tap settings”.
a) Unless otherwise indicated, set to .5 watt.
b) Gymnasium, Cafeteria/Student Dining, Auditorium, rooms greater than
1,000 square feet and Mechanical rooms shall be set at 2 watts or 8
watts where 8 watt speakers are used.
c) Corridors shall be set at .5 watt.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 47 of 145
d) Classrooms shall be set at 1 watt.
e) Offices shall be set at .25 watt.
f) Provide one back up amplifier for each 50 watts provided to support the
system. Provide 75 percent spare capacity.
All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall
meet or exceed the fire alarm equipment standards. For equipment other than that
specified, the Electrical Subcontractor shall supply proof that such substitute
equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and
quality of the specified equipment. Submit this information for approval by the
engineer at least ten (10) days prior to bid.
G. Fire Alarm Control Panel and Fire Command Center:
1. Fire alarm control panel shall be Autocall 4100ES, Edwards EST3, Notifier NFS-3030 or
equal. Panel shall contain a microprocessor based central processing unit (CPU). Autocall
is the Basis of Design. The FACP shall communicate with and control the following types
of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules,
transponders, local and remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators, Smoke Control
Panels and monitoring/controls, and other system controlled devices. Locate equipment in
the Fire Command Center. Provide lockable cabinet for as built drawings in the Fire
Command Center.
2. Node Capacity and General Operation:
Each node shall provide, or be capable of, expansion to 250 intelligent addressable
devices per loop plus 3000 annunciation points per system. FACP shall support a
minimum of 10 intelligent loops.
Each FACP node shall include a full featured operator interface control and
annunciation panel which shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD),
individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for field
programming and control of the node.
All programming or editing of the existing programming the system shall be achieved
without special equipment or interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire
alarm control panel.
The system shall include emergency voice communications utilizing distributed
amplification and intelligence such that loss of operation by the main FACP will not
result in the loss of evacuation signal throughout the balance of the building.
Each FACP node shall provide the following features:
1) Block Acknowledge Printer Interface
2) Charger rate Control CRT Display Interface
3) Control-by-Time Non-Alarm Module Reporting
4) Day/Night Sensitivity Periodic Detector Test
5) Device Blink Control Remote Page
6) Drift Compensation Trouble Reminder
7) NFPA 72, Sensitivity Test Upload/Download to PC computer
8) System Status Reports Verification Counters
9) Security Monitor Points Walk Test
10) Alarm Verification Maintenance Alert
3. Loop Interface Board (LIB):
Loop interface boards shall be provided to monitor and control each of the Signaling
Line Circuit (SLC) loops in the network node. The loop interface board shall contain
its own microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in local mode in the case
of a failure in the main CPU of the control panel. In local mode, the loop interface
board shall detect alarms and activate output devices on its own SLC loop.
The LIB shall not require any jumper cuts or address switch settings to initialize SLC
Loop operations.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 48 of 145
The loop interface board shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the
intelligent detectors and addressable modules connected to its SLC Loop over a
single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 4,
Style 6, or Style 7.
The LIB shall be able to drive two Style 4 SLC loops, each up to 10,000 feet in
length, for an effective loop span of 20,000 feet.
The loop interface board shall receive analog information from all intelligent
detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or
trouble conditions exist for that particular detector. The loop interface board software
shall include software to automatically adjust and compensate for dust accumulation
to maintain detector performance as it is affected by environmental factors. The
analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the
automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.
The LIB shall communicate with each intelligent addressable detector and
addressable module on its SLC loop and verify proper device function and status.
Communication with up to 198 intelligent devices shall be performed every 6
seconds or less.
4. Enclosures:
Control panels shall be housed in UL listed cabinets suitable for semi-flush
mounting. Cabinets shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat,
and the manufacturer's standard finish.
The back box and door shall be constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top.
The door shall provide a key lock and include a transparent opening for viewing all
indicators. For convenience, the door shall have the ability to be hinged on either
the right or left-hand side.
The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance,
and future expansion.
5. FACP nodes shall be designed so that it permits continued local operation of remote
transponders under both normal and abnormal network communication loop conditions.
This shall be obtained by having transponders operate as local control panels upon loss of
network communication.
6. FACP nodes shall be modular in construction to allow ease of servicing. Each CPU and
transponder shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring the use of any
external programming equipment. Systems, which require use of external programmers or
change of EPROMs are not acceptable.
7. The CPU and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected
by voltage surges or line transients including RFI and EMI.
8. FACP Power Supplies:
Main power supplies shall operate on 120 VAC, 60Hz, and shall provide all
necessary power for the FACP.
Each main supply shall provide 3.0 amps of usable notification appliance power,
using a switching 24 VDC regulator.
The main power supply shall be expandable for additional notification appliance
power in 3.0 ampere steps.
Each main power supply shall provide a battery charger for 60 hours of standby
using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. It shall charge 55 Amp
hour batteries with-in a 48 hour period.
The supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of
detecting earth faults on sensitive addressable modules.
It shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current.
The main power supply shall be power-limited per 1995 UL864 requirements.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 49 of 145
9. System Circuit Supervision:
Each FACP node shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, transponders,
annunciators and peripheral equipment and annunciate loss of communications with
these devices. The FACP CPU shall continuously scan the above devices for proper
system operation and upon loss of response from a device shall sound an audible
trouble, indicate which device or devices are not responding and print the
information on the printer.
Sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, PIV, and main gate valves shall
be supervised for off-normal position.
10. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks shall be the
plug-in type and have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12 AWG wire. Fixed terminal blocks are
not acceptable.
11. Operators Terminal: Provide the following functions in addition to any other functions
required for the system.
Acknowledge (ACK/STEP) Switch:
1) Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single
new Alarm and/or trouble condition shall silence the local panel piezo electric
signal and change the system alarm or trouble LED from flashing mode to
steady-ON mode. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions exist or are
detected and reported in the system, depression of this switch shall advance
the 80-character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
2) Depressing the acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator
piezo sounders.
Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the signal silence switch shall cause all
programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal
condition after an alarm activation. The selection of notification circuits and relays
which are silence able by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the
confines of all applicable standards.
System Reset Switch: Activation of the system reset switch shall cause all local
electronically-latched initiating devices, software zones, output devices and circuits,
to return to their normal condition.
If an alarm condition(s) still exists, or if they reoccur in the system after system reset
switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions.
System Test Switch: Activation of the system test switch shall initiate an automatic
test of all intelligent/addressable detectors in the local system. The system test shall
activate the electronics in each intelligent sensor, simulating an alarm condition and
causing the transmission of the alarm condition from that sensor to the fire alarm
control panel. The fire alarm control panel shall interpret the data from each sensor
installed in the system. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be
displayed automatically on the system LCD and on any CRTs or printers in the
system.
Lamp Test Switch: Activation of the lamp test switch shall sequentially turn on all
LED indicators, system liquid crystal display and local piezo signal, and then
automatically return the fire alarm control panel to the previous condition.
12. Field Programming:
The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without
the need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field
replacement of electronic integrated circuits.
All local FACP node programming shall be accomplished through the FACP
keyboard or through the video display terminal.
All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 50 of 145
The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined
specifically for the system when it is installed. Two levels of password protection
shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status level
changes such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level)
is used for actual change of program information.
13. Specific System Operations:
Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the
sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent detectors in the FACP node from each
system keypad or from the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be
within allowed UL limits.
Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable detectors in the system may
be independently selected and enabled for alarm verification. Each FACP shall keep
a count of the number of times each detector has entered the verification cycle.
These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.
System Point Operations:
1) All devices in the FACP node may be enabled or disabled through the local
keypad or video terminal.
2) Any FACP node output point may be turned on or off from the local system
keypad or the video terminal.
Point Read: The FACP node shall be able to display the following point status
diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point will be
annunciated for the parameters listed:
1) Device Status
2) Device Type
3) Custom Device Label
4) Software Zone Label
5) Device Zone Assignments
6) Detector Analog Value
7) All Program Parameters
System Status Reports: Upon command from a password-authorized operator of the
system, a status report will be generated, and printed, listing all local FACP system
status.
System History Recording and Reporting: Each FACP node shall contain a history
buffer that shall be capable of storing a minimum of 400 system events. Each local
activation will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the
activation, until an operator requests that the contents be either displayed or printed.
The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time,
and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed.
1) The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems which use volatile
memory for history storage are not acceptable.
Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: Each FACP node shall automatically
interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector
responses over a period of time.
1) If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below
or above normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the
particular intelligent detector will be annunciated on the system display,
network display and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall
in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it
require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.
14. System Printer
The system printer shall be an external printer with associated printer stand. Printer
stand shall be capable of holding paper stock and shall provide a holding area for
printouts.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 51 of 145
The printer shall continue to operate from building emergency power or fire alarm
system standby batteries in the event of main power loss.
The printer shall record all system events including operator commands and shall
be capable of providing a printed list of system conditions such as detector
sensitivities, thresholds, analog voltages, device type, and custom message. The
printer shall automatically perform a self test every 24 hours. A trouble condition
shall be generated when printer paper has run out. An internal buffer shall continue
to store events when paper is out.
The printer shall have at least 80 characters per line and capable of printing at 120
characters per second.
H. Addressable Devices – General:
1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 1 to 10)
type address switches.
2. Addressable devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a Dip switch, are
difficult to install and subject to installation error. This type of device is not an allowable
substitute.
3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires
to the FACP signaling line circuit.
4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling
LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be
placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has
been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the
system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an
external remote alarm LED.
5. Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set in the fire alarm control panel and shall be adjustable
in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically
adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.
The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements
of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with
tamper proof feature. Base shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated
at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Class A applications.
8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition
and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector
itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control
panel.
9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use
to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its
designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-
time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal
decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program
and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.
11. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test each detector for 100 percent obscuration,
reported to the FACP.
12. Addressable devices shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and
shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the
type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating
that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 52 of 145
13. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall
report an indication of an analog value reaching 100 percent of the alarm threshold.
I. Addressable Pull Box (Manual Station):
1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module
status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after
actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a
key. Manual pull stations shall be of the double action type.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key
type reset.
3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised
letters, 1.75 inches or larger.
4. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semiflush mounting as shown on the
plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the
finished floor. Stations shall be provided with stopper covers.
J. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector:
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing
the analog level of smoke density.
K. Intelligent Thermal Detectors:
1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit
(58 degrees C) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per
minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.
Up to 99 intelligent heat detectors may connect to one SLC loop.
L. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector:
1. The in-duct smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization
detector or an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides continuous analog
monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.
2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate
action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of
toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system.
3. Label all concealed duct smoke locations with a red phenolic label on ceiling.
4. Provide remote test stations for all duct smokes.
M. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module:
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm
control panel SLC loops.
2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box.
3. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that
shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and
in regular communication with the control panel.
4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package
and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/2 inch. This version need not include
Style D or an LED.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 53 of 145
N. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module:
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact
device).
2. The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4 in. square, 2-1/8 in. deep electrical box or
with an optional surface backbox.
3. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall
be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
O. Addressable Control Module:
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of
one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification
appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may
be set to operate as a dry contract relay.
2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box,
or to a surface mounted backbox.
3. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp
of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation, or as a dry contact
(Form-C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to insure that 100 percent of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be
energized at the same time on the same pair of wires.
4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the main
fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply.
5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of
.6 amps at 30 VDC.
P. Isolator Module:
1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an
SLC loop. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be
rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least one isolator module
shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building.
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit
(disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module
shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.
3. The isolator module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall be totally
automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal
operation.
4. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box or in a surface
mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator
is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been
detected and isolated.
Q. Combustible Gas Detector (CH4)
1. Wall or duct-mounted gas detector for monitoring methane (CH4) installed as a standalone
device with single-gas monitoring.
Size 20.56 x 14.90 x 6.72cm (8.09 x 5.87 x 2.65 in.) (H x W x D); Remote Sensor:
3.5 x 4.5 x 6.5 cm (1.36 x 1.75 x 2.56 in.)
Power Requirement 24 Vac nominal (17-27Vac), 50/60 Hz, 0.35 A; 24Vdc nominal
(20-38Vdc); with remote sensor: 7 W max.
Optional Main AC Input 120Vac nominal, ± 10 percent (with on-board transformer)
Relay Output 2 DPDT relays, 5A @ 250Vac; 5A @ 30Vdc
Communications 4-20mA
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 54 of 145
Operating Environment Commercial, Indoor, Extreme Temperature Environments
Operating Temperature H2S, NO2, O2, CH4, H2, C3H8: -40 to 50ºC (-40 to 122ºF)
CO: -20 to 50ºC (-4 to 122ºF)
Sensor Type Electrochemical cell (CO, NO2, H2S, O2); catalytic (CH4, H2, C3H8,)
Response Time T90 < 50 seconds With ECLAB T90 < 240 seconds
Display 8 character, 2 line backlit LCD
Visual Indicators Green LED: Power Amber LED 1: Alarm/Fault Amber LED 2:
Alarm/Fault
Audible Alarm >85 dBA at 3 m (10 ft)
Accuracy ± 3 percent of full scale @ 25ºC
Enclosure Polycarbonate
Certification CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1, UL 61010-1; FCC part 15; ICES-003 issue 4;
ISO 9001-2008
2. Provide monitor module for each gas detector.
R. Carbon Monoxide Detector
1. Provide CO detector where indicated on drawing. Signal shall be supervisory to central
station and identified as “CO Detector”. The CO sensor base shall have removable CO
element that can either work independently as a toxic gas detector or be combined with a
photo or heat sensor to provide a method to reduce unnecessary alarms from common
sources such as steam from showers, aerosols from personal care products, cooking
materials, dust and exhaust fumes. The CO sensor base does not require a separate
device be mounted onth wall or ceiling.
2. Certifications:
OSHA compliant CO gas sensing: CO condition level may be programmed by
concentration to affect ventilation control.
UL listed – for both UL 2034 and 2075 applications.
Extended Life Span – 10 years of service.
S. Duct mounted carbon monoxide detector:
1. Manufactured by Air Products and Controls Model SL-701 or Equal
2. Product Specifications
Voltages available: 230VAC, 115VAC, 24VAC, 24VDC
APPROVALS Electrochemical Carbon Monoxide Sensor is a UL
Recognized component in accordance with the
requirements of UL2034. Also meets EN50291
requirements. SL-2000 Series Duct Smoke
Detector Fire Alarm Certifications referenced side
one:
UL & CUL Listed (UL268A, UROX, UROX7) File #
S2829 CSFM Listed (3240-1004:105); MEA
Accepted (73-92-E, VOL. 27)
SAMPLING TUBES Provide
required length for duct
coordinate with HVAC drawings
Sectional sampling tube
Metal sampling tube for 6 in. to 2.5 ft. duct width
Metal sampling tube for 2.5 ft. to 5.0 ft. duct width
Metal sampling tube for 5.0 ft. to 10.0 ft. duct
width
ACCESSORIES MSR-50/CO remote accessory
TG-701 aerosol test gas
T-PB power supplies
WP-2000 weatherproof enclosure
(All available from Air Products and Controls Inc.)
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 55 of 145
POWER REQUIREMENTS Input Power Standby Current Alarm
Current
24VAC 55mA 190mA
24VDC 14mA 68mA
115VAC 22mA 32mA
230VAC 12mA 18mA
RELAY CONTACT RATING:
Alarm Contacts Resistive load: 2 sets form “C” rated at 10 Amps
@ 115VAC
Resistive load: 1 set form “A” rated at 2 Amps
Trouble Contacts Resistive load: 1 set form “C” rated at 10 Amps @
115VAC
AIR VELOCITY 100 to 4,000 ft. /min.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 32ºF to 158ºF (0ºC to 70ºC) HUMIDITY 10 percent to 85 percent RH Non-Condensing /
Non-Freezing
WIRING Solid or stranded: #12 to #22 AWG terminals
MATERIAL Grey plastic back box, clear plastic cover
(Makrolon 94V-0)
Do not expose to corrosive atmospheres.
DIMENSIONS 13 ½ in. L x 4 ½ in. W x 2 ¼ in. D
MAX. NET WT.: 2 ½ lbs.
HARDWARE 7 in. exhaust tube, FAST Tube starter sampling
tube, sampling tube end cap, mounting template,
and mounting hardware included.
T. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator:
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display
containing a minimum of 80 characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions from either the network
node or complete network, via the INA.
3. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to a specific (terminal mode) EIA 485
interface. LCD annunciators shall not reduce the annunciation capacity of the system. Each
LCD shall include vital system wide functions such as, system acknowledge, silence and
reset.
4. LCD display annunciators shall mimic the local control panel 80 character display or
network annunciator and shall not require special programming.
5. Annunciator shall provide all functions of the FACP. Provide a hand held microphone in
the annunciator cabinet.
U. Batteries and External Charger:
1. Battery:
Batteries shall be 12 volt, Gell-Cell type.
The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 60 hours plus 10 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. Submit
calculations of selected battery to Engineer for review.
The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid
level checks for refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 56 of 145
V. Addressable Speaker/Strobe Units for Fire and Mass Notification application:
1. The audible notification appliance network consists of addressable Hi-fidelity speakers
located to provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated. Several areas are identified
as acoutsically distinguishable spaces Refer to the design documets for the locations and
requirements of such spaces.
Acoutsically Distinguishable Spaces include: Corridors, Offices, Classrooms,
Conference rooms, nurses area, Administrative areas.
2. The Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other audible
announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm system in a normal or
alarm state. When a mass notification announcement is activated during a fire alarm, all
fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of
the fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances.
3. One-way Tone/Voice Communication:
The evacuation alarm and alert signals shall be capable of being initiated
automatically from the fire alarm control panel (FACP) and transmitted to any
speaker circuit, selected speaker circuits or all speaker circuits.
The alarm signal, alert signal and live and pre-recorded voice announcements shall
be capable of manual transmission from the FACP to any speaker circuit, selected
speaker circuits or all speaker circuits by manual selection of the associated speaker
circuit control switches.
Live voice announcements, via the hand-held microphone or patched in external
source, by use of speaker control switches, shall take priority over all previously
activated alarm inputs. In addition to NFPA 72 requirements, the system shall be
capable of priority live voice announcements over subsequent alarm conditions. In
no case shall subsequent alarms disrupt emergency live voice announcements.
Mass notification activation is the only condition allowed to override the fire alarm
event.
Alarm speaker amplification equipment shall be sized, at 1 watt for every speaker
location shown.
All Speakers shall be high fidelity 200Hz to 1000Hz.
As a minimum, alarm speaker amplification equipment shall be sized to provide the
above indicated wattage of input power to each location type of alarm speaker
shown on the Drawings, plus 20 percent ( 20 percent) spare capacity to permit the
addition of future alarm speakers. Include one back up amplifier for every 100 watts
of primary power supplied.
Within the individual assembly occupancies in this project, an alarm received during
a program occupancy shall sound an alert alarm at a constantly attended location
and perform the following actions:
Deliver a field programmable, digitized custom evacuation message to the
occupants, detailing evacuation instructions.
A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers installed in
remainder of the building directing evacuation using exits other than the assembly
occupancy exit path.
Perform all control functions as detailed elsewhere in this specification
An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be capable of
interruption by the operation of the system microphone to give voice evacuation
instructions overriding the pre-programmed sequences
W. Addressable Visual Unit (Xenon Strobe) and Visual/Fire/MNS unit:
1. Combination white/amber strobe/MNS units - Provide Truealert Synchronized white strobe
(fire)/yellow strobe (MNS event) all in one unit. Unit shall be red with “FIRE” in white
lettering. Yellow strobe shall include “ALERT” in white lettering.
2. Provide candela rating indicated on drawings and in accordance with NFPA requirements.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 57 of 145
3. Adjacent to all combination visual units shown on drawings provide an addressable
speaker
4. Systems that require separate wiring and control modules to support the specified
functionality shall be provided at no additional cost.
X. Mass Notification Local Operator Console:
1. Local Operator Console is designed for indoor use with the Autocall 4100ES control panel
for mass notification applications. The LOC shall contain an InfoAlarm Command Center
with LCD display. The LOC shall only have MNS fuctionality. Fire Alarm controls, resets,
acknowledge, silence functions are not permissible. In addition to the switches and controls
provided inherently with the Command Center, Provide an additional eight black push
on/push off illuminated push buttons for speaker circuit selection, 8 illuminated push
buttons for message selection, and a microphone for live messages. The speaker circuits
shall be fully user defined and not be contingent on circuit wiring. Circuits shall be defined
through system software. Controls shall be installed in a cabinet with glass door and
magnetic lock. Panel shall be labeled “Emergency Communications”. The controls shall be
fully replicated at the main FACP in the event that office personnel are unable to initiate
emergency messages. LOC’s shall also have a minimum of 24 input points for remote
panic button annunciation and control.
Standard features:
1) 24I/O Module
2) 16 illuminated push buttons
3) Magnetic latch
4) 16.5 in. w x 12.63 in. h x 4 in. d 16 ga CRS enclosure
5) Indoor, surface or semi-flush mount
6) Platinum powder coat finish with white silk screened lettering
2. Remote Microphone Assembly (mounted in LOC)
The remote microphone assembly uses power from the panel of the LED. All other
interfaces do not draw any additional power other than what is already accounted
for on the host interface, which is used for supervising the keyswitch, push-to-talk
(PTT), and microphone wiring.
3. Operating Voltage
24V as provided by 4100ES or 24 Point I/O Module.
24V battery current drawing - 25mA max.
4. Environmental Operating Rang
32 deg. F to 120 deg. F (0 deg. C to 49 deg. C)
90 deg. (32 deg. C) at 10 percent to 93 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
5. LOC's shall be programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for page or messaging
at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an indication that the
system is busy (Amber Busy Light)and cannot be used at that time. This is to avoid two
messages being given at the same time. Also, it must be possible to override or lockout
the LOC's from the Master Command Panel (in accordance with NFPA 72.)
Y. Addressable Textual Notification Appliance (MNS): Textual Notification Appliance is to operate
on a compatible Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) and is to provide a high visibility, multi-color LED
text message display.
1. Textual Notification Appliance shall be Listed to UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.
2. Appliance shall be capable of up to thirty two (32) pre-programmed message selections
that can be activated in response to pre-defined emergency situations or linked to specific
system point status conditions.
3. Textual Notification Appliance shall be capable of displaying dual or single line emergency
instructions. Instructions can show as static, flashing, or scrolling with a variety of
appearance/transition options. Instructions shall be capable of displaying using multi-colors
to emphasize instructions content.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 58 of 145
4. Textual Notification Appliance shall be capable of providing non-emergency information
during non-emergency conditions. Emergency conditions will override non-emergency
message/instructions and display emergency instructions.
5. Textual Notification Appliance shall be capable of scrolling instructions of at least 512
characters in length.
6. Textual Notification Appliance shall be viewable from a distance of 100 feet.
7. Textual Notification Appliance shall be powered by the fire alarm MNS power supply at
24VDC with battery back-up included if system battery calculations.
8. Textual Notification Appliance shall be capable of wall or ceiling mounting options.
9. Accessories: The contractor shall furnish the necessary accessories.
Z. Digital Communicator:
1. Provide UL listed digital communicator to transmit signal to fire department via two (2)
dedicated telephone lines. Provide CAT 5 telephone cable in ¾ in.C to telephone
demarcation backboard.
AA. Exterior Strobe-unit:
1. Provide wall mounted, 24 VDL strobe, color red with WRR wall bracket.
BB. Provide clear plastic covers without local audible alarm for pull stations in gym. Provide clear
plastic covers with audible at all other Manual Pull stations.
CC. Magnetic Door Holders:
1. Provide under hardware Section 087100 and installed and wired by Electrical Contractor.
DD. Key Repository Box:
1. Provide a key repository box (es) in accordance with fire department requirements.
EE. Graphic Map: Provide graphic map to the fire department and engineer for review and approval.
1. Graphic map shall show all initiation devices and control panel and othe control locations
annunciator and key boxes. All devices shall be labelled, and all final room numbers shall
be indicated. The map shall be installed behind a plexiglass enclosure along with a frame
equal to spage age electronics GD graphic display frame.
FF. Field Quality Control
1. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a Fire Alarm Technicians with a
minimum of eight years of experience (NICET Level IV) utilized to test and certify the
installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm
technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment,
testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
2. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and
maintenance of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to
include, but shall not be limited to, individuals with the following qualifications:
Factory trained and certified.
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm
certified.
International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) fire alarm certified.
Certified by a state or local authority.
Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national
testing laboratory for the servicing of fire alarm systems.
3. Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in
pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory
performance and conditions are achieved.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 59 of 145
4. Final Test Notice: Provide a ten-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready
for final acceptance testing.
5. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.
Provide 2 year service contract to perform NFPA 72 required testing.
6. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications
and complies with applicable standards.
7. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log.
8. Provide a point list with address devices to be reviewed and approved by the fire
department and engineer prior to programming the system.
9. Perform Db level testing prior to fire department test.
10. Intelligibility Tests:
Intelligibility testing of the System shall be accomplished in accordance with NFPA
72 for Voice Evacuation Systems and IEC 60268-16.
Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:
1) Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement after
installation.
2) Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is provided
in each area where building occupants typically could be found. The minimum
required value for CIS is .8. Rounding is permitted such that an intelligibility
score of 0.75 may be rounded to 0.80. Acoustically Distinguishable Spaces
(ADS) where passing intelligibility scores are not expected will be indicated
on the drawings.
3) Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as
metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may
be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if
approved by the Engineer and Architect, and if building occupants in these
areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk
no more than 33 feet to find a location with at least the minimum required CIS
value within the same area.
4) Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally
present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required
value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and
they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at least the minimum
required CIS value within the same area.
5) Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in the
space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as
appropriate).
6) The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum
required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other walking surface as
follows:
(1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting from any point
subject to occupancy with less than the minimum required CIS value.
(2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches clearance
there from.
(3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum required CIS
value has been obtained.
Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility as specified
by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean value of at least
three readings to compute the intelligibility score at each test location.
Record and submit to the Engineer intelligibility scores prior to final test with authority
having jurisdiction
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 60 of 145
11. Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy:
Test the entire system 100 percent devices in accordance with the Authority Having
Jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of occupancy. Prior to that, and as a
requisite, a separate test will be witnessed by the Engineer of Record.
12. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel and building supervisors to adjust, operate, utilize, troubleshoot, conduct
software installation, and maintain the fire alarm control panel and fire command center.
Provide eight (8) five hour training sessions for Owner’s personnel. Training shall be held
on site in classroom. Manufacturer shall professionally video record training by Factory
Personnel and provide media to Owner. Provide a hard copy of manuals, instructional
videos, and recorded training session(s) on CD or DVD.
ELECTRICITY MUTLI-METERING
A. COORDINATION
1. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and
adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for
equipment access doors and panels.
B. WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
C. PRODUCTS
1. MULTIPLE CHECK METERING SYSTEM
Provide a system of check meters consisting of Multiple Meter Unit Cabinets equal
to E-MON D-MON MMU Series. Multiple Meter Cabinets shall consist of 8, 16 and
24 meters as indicated on Plans. Each meter shall meet the following criteria:
1) Meter shall be fully electronic with 4-line by 20-character backlit LCD display
showing kwh, kW demand (with peak date and time), power factor per phase,
real-time load in kW, Amps per phase and Volts per phase.
2) Meter shall utilize 0-2 volt AC output current sensors to allow paralleling
and/or mounting up to 500 feet from the meter. Sensor shall be of split-core
configuration to allow installation without disconnecting cabling. Sensors
shall be available from 100 amp to 1200 amp. Sensors shall be optionally
available to solid-core configuration (100 & 200 amp.)
3) Meter shall be field programmable for meter date/time and ID code for
communication options.
4) Meter shall provide installation diagnostics on display.
5) Meter shall be enclosed in MMU NEMA 1 enclosure (standard) with
padlocking hasp & mounting flanges for indoor/outdoor installation (stand
alone) with one 1 1/16 in. KO on bottom of enclosure.
6) Meter shall be UL/CUL Listed to latest applicable standards for safety.
7) Meter shall meet or exceed NSI C12.20 accuracy standards.
8) Meter shall provide non-volatile memory to maintain reading during power
outages.
9) Meter shall store interval data or kWh and kVARh for up to 72 days in first-in
first-out formal. (Standard firmware).
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 61 of 145
10) Meter shall be capable of daisy-chain or star connection using RS-485
communications in combinations of Class 3200s, 3400s, 5000s, IDR-8s, IDR-
16s not to exceed 52 devices. Cabling shall be available terminal block (3-
conductor), 18-22AWG, up to 4,000 cable feet total. Class 1000 meters may
be used for single phase loads.
11) Meter shall be provided with the following communication protocols:
a) Requires third-party EMS/BMS system supplied by others.
1. BACnet MS/TP (Replace EZ7 in model with BAC when ordering)
2. Modbus RTU Communications (Replace EZ7 in model with RTU
when ordering)
2. Multiple Meter Unit Cabinets shall be prewired complete with voltage feeds. Clearly label
all meter with load served.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
E-Mon D-Mon
National Meter Industries
Square D
Or Equal
D. Training
1. Provide 4 hours of owner training.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Scope
1. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective
devices (SPD) for the protection of all main service and panelboards.
B. Submittals
1. Submit shop drawings and product information for approval and final documentation in the
quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be
identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number.
2. Submittals shall include UL 1449 3rd Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting
www.UL.com, clicking “Certifications” link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA and
VZCA2:
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV)
I-nominal rating (I-n)
SPD shall be UL listed and labeled as Type 1 or Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type
2 applications
3. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be
presented for visual inspection.
4. Minimum of ten year warranty
C. Related Standards
1. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)
AC Power Circuits,
2. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-
Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits,
3. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected
to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.
4. National Electrical Code: Article 285
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 62 of 145
5. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters
6. UL 1449, Third Edition, effective September 29, 2009 – Surge Protective Devices
D. Quality Assurance
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least five years experience in
manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors.
2. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
3. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of
installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
4. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
Directive 2002/95/EC.
E. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation and
Maintenance Manuals. One copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at
time of shipment.
F. Manufacturers
1. Provide an internally mounted Surge Protective Devices (SPD) formerly called Transient
Voltage Suppressor (TVSS) by:
Siemens Industry.
Current Technology
LEA
Liebert
APT
Cutler Hammer
Or equal
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment
1. Service Entrance
SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 or Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type 2
applications, verifiable at UL.com, without need for external or supplemental
overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G,
shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal overtemperature controls.
SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnectors do not
meet the intent of this specification.
SPD shall be factory installed integral to electrical distribution equipment.
SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n)
SPD shall be UL labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR).
Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all
modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and
impedance grounded Wye systems.
True 10 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide “directly connected protection
elements” between all possible modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye
systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems.
SPD shall be connected external of the distribution equipment with an appropriately
sized 200kA SCCR rated disconnect.
SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1) Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 300kA per phase.
2) Maximum 10-Mode surge current capability shall be 300kA per phase.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 63 of 145
3) UL 1449 - Third Edition Revision; effective September 29, 2009 Voltage
Protection Ratings shall not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L MCOV
208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 1200V 150V
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V 320V
UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) (verifiable at
UL.com):
System Voltage
Allowable System Voltage
Fluctuation (percent) MCOV
208Y/120 25 percent 150V
480Y/277 15 percent 320V
SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of -
50dB at 100 kHz.
Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, each exceeding
30mm diameter.
SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module.
SPD shall be equipped with the following diagnostics:
1) Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per
phase, and one red service LED.
2) Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function
(excluding branch).
3) Form C dry contacts
4) Optional – Surge Counter
5) No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before
or after installation.
SPD shall have a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond.
SPD shall have a 10 year warranty.
2. Distribution Panel
SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type 2 applications,
verifiable at UL.com, without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls.
Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by
internal overcurrent and thermal overtemperature controls. SPDs relying upon
external or supplementary installed safety disconnectors do not meet the intent of
this specification.
SPD shall be factory installed integral to electrical distribution equipment.
SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n)
SPD shall be UL labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR).
Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all
modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and
impedance grounded Wye systems.
SPD shall be connected to the buss of the distribution equipment with an
appropriately sized 200kA SCCR rated disconnect.
SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1) Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 50kA per phase.
2) Maximum 10-Mode surge current capability shall be 50kA per phase.
3) UL 1449 - Third Edition Revision; effective September 29, 2009, Voltage
Protection Ratings shall not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L MCOV
208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 1200V 150V
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V 320V
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 64 of 145
UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) (verifiable at
UL.com):
System Voltage
Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation
(percent) MCOV
208Y/120 25 percent 150V
480Y/277 15 percent 320V
SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of -
50dB at 100 kHz.
Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, each exceeding
30mm diameter.
SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module.
SPD shall be equipped with the following diagnostics:
1) Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per
phase, and one red service LED.
2) Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function
(excluding branch).
3) Form C dry contacts
4) Optional – Surge Counter
5) No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before
or after installation.
SPD shall have a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond.
SPD shall have a ten year warranty.
3. Branch Panels
The panelboard shall be UL 67 Listed and the SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as
Type 1 or as Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type 2 applications.
The unit shall be top or bottom feed according to requirements. A circuit directory
shall be located inside the door.
SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1) Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 50kA per phase.
2) Maximum 10-Mode surge current capability shall be 50kA per phase.
3) UL 1449 - Third Edition Revision; effective September 29, 2009, Voltage
Protection Ratings shall not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L MCOV
208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 1200V 150V
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V 320V
UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) (verifiable at
UL.com):
System Voltage
Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation
(percent) MCOV
208Y/120 25 percent 150V
480Y/347 15 percent 320V
SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of -
50dB at 100 kHz.
Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, each exceeding
30mm diameter.
SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module.
SPD shall be equipped with the following diagnostics:
1) Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per
phase, and one red service LED.
2) Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function
(excluding branch).
3) Form C dry contacts
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 65 of 145
4) Optional – Surge Counter
5) No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before
or after installation.
SPD shall have a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond.
SPD shall have a 10 year warranty.
The unit shall have removable interior.
The main bus shall be copper and rated for the load current required.
The unit shall include a 200 percent rated neutral assembly with copper neutral bus.
The unit shall be provided with a safety ground bus.
The field connections to the panelboard shall be main lug or main breaker.
The unit shall be constructed with flush or surface mounted trim and shall be in a
NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
H. Installation
1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations and contract documents.
I. Adjustments and Cleaning
1. Remove debris from installation site and wipe dust and dirt from all components.
2. Repaint marred and scratched surfaces with touch up paint to match original finish.
J. Testing
1. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are
torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture’s recommendations.
2. Check all installed panels for proper grounding, fastening and alignment.
K. Warranty
1. Equipment manufacturer warrants that all goods supplied are free of non-conformities in
workmanship and materials for one year from date of substantial completion operation.
LEVEL 2 AC DUAL ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING EQUIPMENT (EVSE)
A. Scope: Furnish and install Level 2 AC Dual Electric Vehicle Charging equipment as specified
herein and as shown on the contract drawings.
B. References: The electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) and all components shall be
designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest version of the following
standards (unless otherwise noted):
1. SAE J1772, Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler
2. SAE J2836 , Use Cases for Communication Between Plug-in Vehicles and the Utility Grid
3. SAE J2847, Communication between Plug-in Vehicles and the Utility Grid
4. SAE J2931, Digital Communications for Plug-in Electric Vehicles
5. National Electric Code Article 625, Electric Vehicle Charging System
6. UL 2231, Personnel Protection Systems for Electric Vehicle (EV) Supply Circuits
7. UL 2594, Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
8. UL 1998, Software in Programmable Components
9. CSA C22.2 No. 107.1, General Use Power Supplies
10. FCC Part 15, Class B
C. Submittals – for Review/Approval
1. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
Product data sheets
Installation Manuals
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 66 of 145
D. Submittals – for construction
1. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
Final as-built drawings
Wiring diagrams
Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions
E. Qualifications
1. The manufacturer shall have been self-manufacturing EVSE or similar transportation
electrification equipment for a minimum of three years. The manufacturer shall also have
been in manufacturing for a minimum of five (5) years.
F. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. EVSE being stored prior to installation shall be stored so as to maintain the equipment in
a clean and dry condition as required by the manufacturer’s instructions, in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the
equipment at time of shipment.
G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly
shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete
assembly.
H. Warranty
1. The manufacturer warrants equipment to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for 1 year from date of substantial completion.
I. Manufacturers
1. Chargepoint
2. Siemens
3. General Electric
4. Or equal
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved
from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Basis of Design is Chargepoint CT4021.
J. Construction
1. Provide a third party recognized AC, Level 2 charging station, quantities and current ratings
as shown on drawings.
2. Physical Specifications
Enclosure Construction and Finish
1) Enclosure shall be manufactured from aluminum or other corrosion resistant
material
2) Enclosure shall consist of a coat of thermosetting, polyester powder paint
applied electrostatically with a metallic finish.
Enclosure Mounting
1) Pedestal Mount Single SAE J1772 connector
Cable Length
1) 25 feet
Connector and Cable Management
1) The EVSE shall incorporate a cord management system or method to
minimize the potential for cable entanglement, user injury or connector
damage from lying on the ground and comply with NEC articles 625 as it
applies to cord management systems.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 67 of 145
2) The EVSE shall include a dock for inserting the SAE J1772 connector when
not in use.
3) The EVSE connector and cable assembly shall be field replaceable.
The EVSE shall include a removable device panel to allow for field retrofits and
replacement of optional equipment.
3. Environmental
Operating Temperature
1) -22 F (-30 C) to 104 F (40 C)
Surge Withstand
1) 6kV at 3000A
Humidity
1) 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing
2) Corrosion Resistance
3) The enclosure coating shall have a corrosion resistance of 600 hours to 5
percent salt spray.
The printed circuit boards (PCB’s) integral to the EVSE shall be conformal coated.
4. User Interface
The station’s display shall be simple, with universal symbols accompanying text to
allow easy understanding and use of the EVSE.
The EVSE shall include the following status indicators:
1) Power
2) Charging
3) Charging Complete
4) Remotely Controlled
5) Temporary Fault
6) Service
The EVSE shall include the following:
1) Reset Pushbutton
5. Protection
The EVSE shall provide integral overcurrent protection at 5 percent over the
nameplate rating.
The EVSE shall provide integral ground fault interruption of 20mA per UL 2231.
The EVSE shall incorporate an automatic ground fault detection feature at the
beginning of each plug session.
The EVSE shall incorporate a manual ground fault test feature.
1) The EVSE shall include a DIP switch enabled Automatic Reset feature to
allow the station to reset after a temporary fault without user interaction.
The EVSE shall include a DIP switch enabled Soft Start feature to allow for the ramp
up of current to the Available Line Current or Nameplate Current Rating of EVSE.
The EVSE shall include a Cold-Load Pickup feature to allow for randomized restart
on power failure and/or delay before charging resumes after a power failure.
6. Input / Output
The EVSE shall include a normally closed (NC) dry contact permissive run input.
7. Communications and Data Collection
The EVSE shall be open architecture with native Modbus RTU and RS-232 Serial
communications.
The EVSE shall allow for curtailment of the maximum current output through Modbus
communications.
The EVSE shall be capable of Master / End Device configurations through a Modbus
RTU daisy chain topology.
8. Required Accessories
Systems Integration Enabled
1) Communications for Open Charge Point Protocol networking
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 68 of 145
2) Authentication and Payment Authorization
a) Swipe Credit Card Reader for time based payments
3) Local area network 2.4Ghz Wi-Fi(802.11b/g/n)
4) Wide area network 3G GSM, 3G CDMA
K. Factory Testing
1. Each EVSE shall undergo factory testing of all operational and protective features prior to
shipment.
L. Installation
1. The Electrical SubContractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s
recommendations and contract drawings.
2. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Electrical
SubContractor.
M. Training
1. Provide four (4) hours of owner training with manufacturer’s representative present.
N. Service plan
1. Provide a 5 year service plan for each station.
AUTOMATED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General: Summary
1. Section Includes:
Addressable Networked Light Management System.
B. References
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
2. cULus Listing/Certification
Certified as Energy Management Equipment (UL 916)
Certified as Emergency Lighting Equipment (UL 924)
Meet Heat and Smoke Release for Air-Handling Spaces (UL 2043)
3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) / Industry Canada (IC)
4. California Energy Commission (CEC)
5. Local Building Codes
C. System Description
1. Lighting Control System includes computer-based software that provides control,
configuration, monitoring and reports. System including but not limited to the following
components:
Central Control Unit
System Server
0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts or 0-10V LED Drivers
System Field Devices (Input and Output Modules)
Lighting Control System Software
Lighting Controllers
Communication Wire
Occupancy sensors
Photo sensors
Wireless site lighting control modules (#WSLC), one per pole mounted fixture
Wireless Manager for site lighting
Wireless Control modules #WCM
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 69 of 145
Lighting control panels
Interface to audio visual equipment
Interface to BACnet
Interface to Tridium Niagara
Incandescent low-voltage dimming modules
Tunable white light programming
Coordination of final lighting programming
Owner training
D. Submittals
1. Bill of Materials: Complete list of all parts needed to fully install selected system
components.
2. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
3. Shop and Wiring Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing control system, as supplied,
including one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, interconnection diagrams
showing field-installed wiring and physical dimensions of each item.
4. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with
connected monitoring and control devices and systems specified in other Sections.
Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove
compatibility of inputs and outputs.
For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from
manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of
the network protocol.
5. Software Operational Documentation:
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On compact disc or DVD, complete with data files.
Prinout of software application and graphic screens, or upon request, a live
demonstration of Control, Configure and Analyze functionality or a video
demonstrating above stated system capabilities.
6. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
7. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
8. Warranty: Copy of applicable warranty.
E. Quality Assurance
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be one who is experienced in performing the work of
this section, and who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this
project.
2. Manufacturer Requirements: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years
experience manufacturing networked lighting control systems and shall provide 24/7
telephone support by qualified technicians.
3. Contractor shall ensure that lighting system control devices and assemblies are fully
compatible and can be integrated into a system that operates as described in the lighting
control notes on drawings and as described within this specification. Any incompatibilities
between devices, assemblies, and system controllers shall be resolved between the
contractor and the system provider to ensure proper system operation and maintainability.
4. Performance Requirements: provide all system components that have been manufactured,
assembled, and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without
defects, damage, or failure.
5. Performance Testing Requirements
Manufacturer shall 100 percent test all equipment prior to shipment. Sample testing
is not acceptable.
6. Code Requirements
System Control Unit and System Field Devices shall be cULus listed and certified.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 70 of 145
All system components shall be FCC /IC compliant.
All system components shall be installed in compliance with National Electrical
Codes and Canadian Electrical Code.
Building Codes: All units shall be installed in compliance with applicable, local
building codes.
7. ISO Certification: System components shall be manufactured at ISO-9000 certified plants.
F. COORDINATION
1. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible
components.
Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control
functions.
Display graphics showing building areas controlled; include the status of lighting
controls in each area.
G. Delivery, Storage & Handling
1. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
2. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging
with intact identification labels.
3. Storage and Protection: Store materials away from exposure to harmful weather conditions
and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
H. Warranty
1. On-going system expansion, service and support shall be available from multiple factory
certified vendors. Recommended service agreements shall be submitted at the time of bid
complete with manufacturers suggested inventory and pricing for system parts and
technical support labor.
2. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
3. Manufacturer’s Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted free of defects in materials and
workmanship.
Warranty Period: All system hardware components shall have full warranty (non-
prorated) for at least four years and all software components shall carry a warranty
of 90 days from date of installation.
Owner Rights: Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, not a limitation of, other
rights the Owner may have under contract documents, or warranties of third party
component manufacturers.
I. Basis of Design Products
1. Controls: ENCELIUM Energy Management System by OSRAM SYLVANIA
2. Sensors: ENCELIUM Sensors by OSRAM SYLVANIA & Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
J. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers
1. Controls: Lutron, N-light, Philips, or equal.
2. Sensors: Lutron, Sensor Switch, Watt Stopper, Leviton, Cooper or equal.
K. System Performance Requirements
1. This specification is intended to fully describe all of the design, engineering, programming,
hardware, software, ancillary devices and associated technical services required to provide
a building-wide networked lighting control system. This system is specified to perform
scheduled and automated lighting control sequences.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 71 of 145
2. The lighting control “system” shall include a fully distributed WAN/LAN network of global
controller/routers, individually addressable System Field Devices, sensors, switches,
relays and other ancillary devices required for a complete and operable system. The
system WAN/LAN shall be commissioned by ENCELIUM personnel or other ENCELIUM
certified commissioning contractors.
3. The basis of system design shall utilize non-propriety industry standard 0-10V dimming or
fixed output ballasts and/or 0-10V LED drivers, occupancy sensors, and daylight sensors.
4. On-going system expansion, service and support shall be available from multiple factory
certified vendors. Recommended service agreements may be submitted at the time of bid
complete with manufacturers suggested inventory and pricing for system parts and
technical support labor.
5. Lighting Control Software: The system shall offer two separate levels of lighting control:
one personal lighting control for the average building occupant to control and adjust basic
lighting functions in their workspace, and two central lighting control for the facility lighting
administrator to perform energy management, configuration maintenance, monitoring
operations, and providing support to building occupants.
Native central control software shall be utilized for energy reporting status and
complete programming without the need for any third party hardware or software.
Systems that require any third party linked software or graphics shall be
unacceptable.
Software shall provide information on general system settings via mouse click on a
floor plan. Left clicking over a device on the graphical software interface shall show
a description of the selected device/function attribute.
6. Central Lighting Control:
Shall provide an Interactive, Web-based graphical user interface (GUI) showing floor
plans and lighting layouts that are native to the lighting control software. The only
means required to program and operate the lighting control system shall be
programmed and operated from a user interface that is based on a plan view
graphical screen on the user’s computer or the lighting control system’s main
computer. Shall include the navigational features listed below to allow for user’s
orientation within the controlled space, geographic heading and/or landmarks:
1) Interactive
2) Vector based
3) Zoom
4) Rotate
5) Pan
6) Tilt
Shall allow building operator to navigate through an entire facility both in two-
dimensional and three-dimensional multi-floor view, allowing for fast and easy
navigation.
Three-dimensional view shall exclude walls and other structural features to avoid
shadowing and cluttering of the plan view.
All programming, assignments of lighting loads to control strategies, lighting status
and lighting energy reporting shall be native to the software and executed from this
GUI. Editing shall be available from this GUI in a drag and drop format or from drop
down menus without the need for any third party software. Systems that utilize or
require third party linked graphics are unacceptable. The GUI shall continuously
indicate the status of each connected device on the system and a warning indicator
on the software if a device goes offline. Systems requiring spreadsheet editing for
programming and that don’t offer real time feedback are not acceptable.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 72 of 145
Software settings and properties shall be selectable per individual device, room
based, floor based or global building based.
1) Lighting Control Software interface shall provide current status and enable
configuration of all system zones including selected individual fixture
availability, current light level, maximum light level, on/off status, occupancy
status, and emergency mode (response to an emergency signal) status.
Shall have the ability to display various lighting system parameters such as Lighting
status (ON/OFF); Lighting levels, Load shedding status, or Lighting energy
consumption, Occupancy status in a colorized gradient (“weather” map) type of
graphical representation.
Energy Analysis data shall be exportable in a CSV or similar format.
Shall allow import of native AutoCAD files.
7. Reports: Reporting feature shall be native to the lighting control software and capable of
reporting the following parameters for each device and zone individually without requiring
any third party hardware and software:
Energy consumption broken down by energy management strategy.
Energy demand broken down by energy management strategy.
Occupancy data by zone.
Building wide occupancy status
Lighting energy consumption in a color gradient (“weather map” type) view
Energy performance reports shall be printable in a printer friendly format and
downloadable for use in spreadsheet applications.
8. Personal Lighting Controls: The Personal Control Software interface shall provide current
status and enable each user with the ability to dim and brighten lights, and turn them on
and off by individual fixture or zone. The Software shall offer user configurable light scenes,
which may be programmed and then selected via the Software. Personal lighting control
shall be available in open/private office environments.
9. Daylight Harvesting (Light Regulation Averaging): In a photo sensor-equipped system, the
Central Controller Unit shall rationalize changes to light levels when ambient (natural) light
is available and shall maintain a steady light level when subjected to fluctuating ambient
conditions where dimming ballasts and/or drivers exist. Areas equipped with fixed output
ballasts and/or drivers shall energize when natural light falls below foot-candle levels
specified. System shall utilize light level inputs from common and/or remote sensor
locations to minimize the number of photo sensors required. The System shall operate with
multiple users in harmony and not react adversely to manual override inputs.
10. Time Clock Scheduling: The system shall be programmable for scheduling lights on or off
via the Lighting Control Software interface.
Support for BACnet Time Schedule Object: This allows the export of Lighting Control
time schedules to BACnet devices and vice versa in the event of Lighting Control
System’s integration with BACnet.
Override: Manual adjustments via lighting controllers or personal control software
shall temporarily override off status imposed by time clock schedule.
Response to Power Failure: In the event of a power failure, the time clock shall
execute schedules that would still be in progress had they begun during the power
outage.
Flick Warning: Prior to a scheduled lights-off event or expiry of a temporary override,
the system shall provide two short light level drops as a warning to the affected
occupants. Flick warning time shall have the ability to be programmed via software
between one and five minutes.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 73 of 145
11. Load Shed Mode: An automatic load shedding mode shall be available where, when
activated through the system, the control unit will reduce its output to a programmable
maximum electrical demand load. The system shall not shed more load than required and
load shedding priority shall be centrally configurable by control zone or by common uses
(i.e., all hallways can be treated as one load shed group), with subsequent load shed
priority groupings being utilized until the required defined load has been shed, for either a
defined period, or until the demand response input has been removed. Systems that simply
select a “load shed scene” whereby there is no guarantee that the defined required load
will actually be shed are not acceptable.
12. Emergency Mode: There shall be a mode, when activated through the system, that will
immediately adjust lights to full light output and retain that level until the mode is
deactivated in the event of an emergency. This setting shall override all other inputs. The
system shall interface with the building of life safety transfer switch, fire alarm control panel,
and security system control panel.
13. Addressing: All ballasts and/or drivers shall be centrally addressable, on a per fixture or
multiple fixtures/zone basis, through the Central Control Software. The basis of design shall
utilize industry standard 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers
connected to an Output Module. To simplify ongoing maintenance, the system shall not
require manual recording of addresses for the purpose of commissioning or
reconfiguration.
14. Programmable Task Tuning: Maximum light level programmability shall be available by
individual fixture.
15. Unoccupied State: The system shall provide two states when occupancy status is vacant
as per an occupancy sensor: lights turn off or lights adjust to configurable (dimmed) light
level.
16. Occupied State: The system shall be capable of creating “comfort” or “support” zones to
ensure that occupants are not isolated by turning off lights in adjacent areas for occupant
comfort and safety, such as a hallway path to exit the premises.
17. The Automated Lighting Control System (ALCS) BACnet Interface shall share the following
information with the BACnet enabled Building Automation System and other systems listed
below:
Property BACnet Type Description
Lighting Load Analog Value* Reports the total lighting
load of the ALS, defined in
Watts
Light Zone State Binary Value* State of the defined lighting
zone - ON or OFF
Light Zone Dimming Analog Value* Light output level of the
defined lighting zone, from
100 percent (maximum light
output) to 0 percent
(minimum light output)
Emergency System State Binary Input State of the emergency
alarm system: alarm
activated or alarm not
activated
Fire Alarm State Binary Input State of the fire alarm
system: alarm activated or
alarm not activated
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 74 of 145
Security System State Binary Input State of security alarm
system:
alarm activated or alarm not
activated
Occupancy State Binary Output State of the defined
occupancy sensor –
occupancy detected or not
detected
Sheddable Load Analog Output Reports the total lighting
load available for load
reduction according to ALS,
defined in Watts
Shed Status Analog Output Reports the total current
load reduction achieved
according to ALS defined
prioritization, defined in
Watts
Shed Request Analog Input Requested total amount of
load reduction, defined in
Watts or as a percentage of
sheddable load
Sheddable Load (Group) Analog Output (As above, unprioritized for
the selected group)
Shed Status (Group) Analog Output (As above, unprioritized for
the selected group)
Shed Request (Group) Analog Input (As above, unprioritized for
the selected group)
18. LAN Operations: System shall be capable of operating independent of building’s existing
network infrastructure if desired and shall not rely on tenant supplied PCs for operation.
Network infrastructure shall only be utilized for Personal Control Software.
19. Firewall Security: Firewall technology shall be utilized to separate tenants from the lighting
control network.
20. Lamp Burn In: The system software shall not permitt dimming of new lamps prior to
completion of lamp manufacturer 100 hour recommended accumulated operation at full
brightness. 21. Re-configurability: The assignment of individual fixtures to zones shall be centrally
configurable by Central Control Software such that physical rewiring will not be necessary
when workspace reconfiguration or re-zoning is performed. Removal of covers, faceplates,
and ceiling tiles. shall not be required.
22. Automatic Control Parameters: Occupancy sensor time delays shall be configurable
through software. Light level sensor parameters shall be configurable through software. 23. Automatic Time Adjustment: System shall automatically adjust for leap year and daylight
savings time and shall provide weekly routine and annual holiday scheduling.
24. Contact closure input: System shall be capable of receiving a momentary and sustained
contact closure input from third party sources to control lighting zones.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 75 of 145
25. The light management system shall interface digitally with the building automation system
via BACnet/IP and Tridium Niagara AX interface. The lighting control system shall
communicate the status of output devices (lighting loads) as well as input devices (dry
contacts, switches, occupancy sensors, vacancy sensors, and photocells) over this
connection allowing the building automation system to utilize lighting control system input
devices such as occupancy sensors to determine if mechanical control zones are occupied
for climate adjustments.
26. The system software shall provide a web based energy dashboard to show real time
energy savings data and carbon footprint reductions.
27. Migration Plan to Control LED Fixtures
System shall be capable of migrating from the control of 0-10V Ballasts to 0-10V
LED Drivers utilizing the same Output Modules without the need to change control
hardware.
L. Lighting Controllers
1. Description: The system shall include separate lighting controllers for each of the listed
functionalities and at minimum meet listed electromagnetic, mechanical, electrical and
data specifications:
Software configurable lighting controller that provides on/off switching and dimming
control for up to three lighting zones/scenes per controller or more with allowable
multi-gang configurations. Status is indicated by an LED display to indicate function,
scene or zone. Allows manual override of the time schedule.
Manual dimming and/or switching lighting controller that provides local on/off and
dimming control over at least three lighting zones. Allows manual dimming of light
levels and override of the time schedule.
Scenes in the central control software shall be synchronized with the buttons on the
lighting controller.
Lighting controllers shall fit in a standard Decorator style wall plate and may be
ganged together.
2. General
Addressing: All controllers shall be individually addressable & reconfigurable via
Central Control Software.
Shall provide local on/off or dimming control over lighting zones
Shall utilizing a standard single-gang or multi-gang form factor
Shall have a terminal block that connects to lighting system with 18 AWG, polarity
independent , CMP rated and low voltage wire
Shall be manufactured with push-in wire receptacles
LED’s: All controllers shall feature LED’s to indicate light on and light off status.
Color: All controllers shall meet NEMA WD1 color specifications.
Style: All controllers shall feature Decorator styling wall plates.
Lighting scenes reconfigure automatically based on scene changes from personal
control software.
Industrial lighting controllers shall also be available for damp location applications.
Shall comply or exceed the following electromagnetic requirements:
1) EN 61000-4-2
2) EN 61000-4-4
3) EN 61000-4-5
4) FCC Part 15/ICES-003
3. Mechanical Specifications:
Dimensions: Shall meet NEMA WD-6 spec.
Maximum Operating Ambient Temperature: 60 deg C.
Mounts in standard size wall box suitable for multi gang installation or alternative of
Low Voltage mounting bracket.
Suitable for use with Decorator style wall plates.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 76 of 145
4. Electrical Specifications:
Class 2 Low Voltage device.
Power through interconnected 18 AWG cable with 2-pin header
5. Data Specifications:
Class 2 communication bus that uses prefabricated 18 AWG cable.
M. Wireless Site Lighting Control Module
1. The wireless site lighting control module shall extend the networked light management
system’s controls capability to a building’s surroundings or site such as parking lots and
short pathways, via a wireless mesh network based on Zigbee standards. The wireless
site lighting control installs on top of a luminaire via an ANSI C136.41 compliance 7-pin
twist-lock connector.
2. The wireless site lighting control shall be individually addressable via the wireless system
management and can switch luminaires ON/OFF via an integrated high current relay, dim
luminaires equipped with 0-10V dimming drivers or ballasts and has an input for an external
occupancy sensor.
3. Specifications:
Power:
1) Operating voltage 120V-347V
2) Power consumption as no load: <1.0W
3) Surge protection: 6kV, 6kA
Load Rating: 10A: Electronic driver/ballast, magnetic ballast, resistive load
Interface:
1) Single dimming output that is 0-10V (IEC 60929 Annex E), DA-LI or DEXAL
compatible.
2) Sink/source 10 mA
3) Senor Input: Maximum 20 mA; minimum 18; nominal 19.5V
Software:
1) Individual addressability
2) Time schedule based control
3) Daylight based control
4) Astronomical schedule based control
5) Occupancy based control
Power Metering
1) V, I, P Energy
a) Accuracy is <2 percent from 0.5A to 10A load
b) Accuracy is <5 percent below 0.5A
Environmental
1) Operational Temp: -40 deg. F to +150 deg. F (-40 deg. C to +65 deg. C)
2) Relative humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent
3) Ingress protection: IP66
Communication
1) Wireless protocol: ZigBee
2) Radio Frequency: 2.4 GHz
3) Transmit power: 20 dBm
4) Up to 1,000 ft. Line of sight between modules
Physical
1) Base diameter: 3.31 in. (84 mm); height: 2.61 in. (66.4 mm)
2) Weight: 0.44lbs (200g)
3) Color: black
4) Housing: UV stabilized PC
Regulatory
1) UL/916/773 cULus listed
2) Meets ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and CEC Title 24 requirements
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 77 of 145
3) FCC Part 15/ICES-003
N. Wireless Manager
1. The wireless manager shall collect, process and distribute lighting control information to
control modules over a wireless mesh network. Each wireless manager typical can control
up to 100 nodes.
2. The wireless manager is the central intelligence point in the system for the wireless
devices. It collects signal information from control modules, it then determines appropriate
brightness levels or ON/OFF status for each fixture and zone.
3. Specifications:
Wireless Range: 100 ft. line of sign, 50 ft through standard walls
Wireless manager Network Port – Ethernet 1-/100BaseTx Cat. 5 RJ45 port
Dual PoE ports for daisy chain of up to 3 wireless managers
Status LED on front of unit
Configuration stored in non-volatile flash memory
Weights: 115g (4.06oz) wireless manager 40g (1.41 ox) ceiling mounted kit
Operating temperature range: 32 deg. F to 104 deg. F (0 deg. C to 40 deg. C)
AES 128-bit encryption for wireless communication
Dimensions: 2.81 in. W x 4.631 in. H x 0.78 D (71.37mm W x 117.6mm H x 19.81mm
D)
Includes Polaris 3D software
cULus Listed
1) Energy Management Equipment (UL 916)
Complies with the following electromagnetic requirements:
1) EN 61000-4-2
2) EN 610000-4-4
3) EN 610000-4-5
FCC Part 15/ICES-003
O. System Field Devices (Input and Output Modules)
1. General: Input Modules provide a common interface to low voltage occupancy sensors and
photo sensors while Output Modules provide a common interface to 0-10V Dimming, Fixed
Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers and analog dimming devices such as
incandescent low-voltage dimming modules. These modules automatically self-address
and detect the type of devices they are connected to (i.e., photo sensor, occupancy sensor,
0-10V ballast, 0-10V LED drivers or incandescent dimming module) and establish two-way
communication between the system Control Unit (CU) and themselves. These individually
addressable modules enable each lighting component to be independently controlled and
configured to best meet the needs of the facility.
Addressing: System Field Devices shall be individually addressable via Central
Control Software.
System shall automatically address individual nodes during system commissioning
thus eliminating the need to pre-address devices or record serial numbers during
installation.
Modules shall at minimum meet the listed general, mechanical and environmental
specifications set at below.
2. Provide Wireless site lighting control (WSLC) module for all site lighting unless specifically
noted on the electrical site plan.
3. Air Gap Off
Definition: Air Gap Off shall refer to the physical disconnection of AC power to the
ballast or driver when “OFF” is selected either automatically or manually, thus
ensuring maximum energy savings by eliminating off-state phantom power losses
as well as ensuring that no potentially lethal high-voltage is present at the ballast or
driver when the lights appear to be off (for life-safety reasons).
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 78 of 145
Provisions: Provide an air-gap off relay for each control zone in the system. Where
each fixture is to be controlled (dimmed and/or switched) independently, provide one
relay per fixture. Where multiple fixtures are to be controlled (dimmed and/or
switched), provide one relay per control zone, sized to handle both the inrush current
as well as the maximum connected load, at the specified voltage.
4. General Specifications:
Shall supply 12VDC (up to 24VDC) to sensors.
Shall have 2 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick
connecting Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC.
Two models, one rated for regular indoor use and other for use in damp locations
such as basements, cold storage areas. shall be available.
Memory: Retains all system settings in non-volatile memory.
5. Mechanical Specifications:
Wiring: The System Field Device shall not require wiring connections to the System
apart from pre-terminated, quick connecting 18 AWG, polarity independent quick
connecting Class 2 communication bus.
6. Environmental Specifications:
Operating Temperature Range: -40 deg C to +55 deg C.
Humidity: 0 percent to 100 percent RH condensing rated for damp locations.
0 percent to 95 percent RH non-condensing rated for indoor locations.
P. Energy Control Unit
1. General: The Energy Control Unit (ECU) is a rack or wall mounted lighting control device
that collects, processes and distributes lighting control information to System Field Devices
and lighting controllers over a Class 2 communication bus. Each ECU has multiple Class
2 communication channels and can control a large quantity of nodes (sensors, lighting
controllers, 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and 0-10V LED Drivers.) per channel,
per the manufacturers recommended maximum. The ECU is the central intelligence point
for the area that it controls, collecting signal information from sensors, lighting controllers
and personal control software and determining appropriate brightness levels or on/off
status for each fixture or zone. Each ECU has an Ethernet connection for communication
with a facility’s or tenant’s Local Area Network (LAN) to enable desktop personal control.
Shall interconnect with other ECUs and System Server Unit (SSU) using standard
Ethernet connection that employs TCP/IP protocol.
Control units shall at minimum meet the mechanical, electrical, data,
electromagnetic and environmental specifications listed below.
2. Mechanical Specifications:
Shall mount in a standard 1 inch rack (1U width), or alternatively where no rack is
shown, via an individual wall mount.
3. Electrical Specifications:
Power Supply: 120V/60Hz/200W. Provide dedicated 120V receptacle fed from a
dedicated normal power circuit; do not connect to a UPS or normal/emergency
power source.
4. Data Specifications:
Shall have 8 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick
connecting Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC
Each ECU channel shall support up to 100 nodes or 800 nodes in total.
Each ECU shall have two Ethernet 10/100Base - Tx Cat 5 RJ45 ports that employs
TCP/IP protocol:
1) Lighting Control Network
2) Tenant LAN Access Point
Shall have a status LED on front of unit.
Shall have configuration stored in non-volatile flash memory.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 79 of 145
5. Shall comply or exceed the following electromagnetic requirements:
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
FCC Part 15/ICES-003
6. Environmental Specifications:
Operating Temperature Range: -20 deg C to +40 deg C.
Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent RH non-condensing.
Q. System Server Unit
1. General: System Server Unit (SSU) shall host the lighting control system database for all
the lighting control devices. Server shall have the ability to:
Remotely access a system in order to change system settings or configuration;
Analyze system performance or energy data or generate system report;
Record energy consumption with average sampling every 5 minutes for unlimited
duration;
Host the web interface required for the web enabled Personal Control Software or
web based Central Control Software;
Optionally can reside on a client server (virtual server) thus eliminating the need for
dedicated physical hardware if desired;
Interconnect with ECUs over standard Ethernet connection that employs TCP/IP
protocol;
2. Hardware based servers shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:
Specifications:
1) Mechanical Specifications:
a) Shall mount in a standard 19 inch rack (1U width), or alternatively where
no rack is shown, via an individual wall mount.
Electrical Specifications:
1) Power Supply: 120V/60Hz/200W. Provide dedicated 120V receptacle fed
from a dedicated normal power circuit.
Regulatory:
1) FCC (US only) Class A.
2) DOC (Canada) Class A.
3) UL 60950.
4) CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950.
R. Communication Wire
1. Wiring: 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick connecting wiring. The system
shall have the capability to use both Class 1 and Class 2 wiring. The maximum connected
length of wiring shall be 2500 ft. per channel.
2. Field Bus: Integrates peripheral devices such as 0-10V ballasts and/or 0-10V LED drivers,
occupancy sensors, photo sensors, relay-based controls, power packs and low voltage
wall controls into a complete, networked programmable lighting control system. Provides
power to photo sensors, PIR occupancy sensors and dual-technology occupancy sensors.
Devices may be connected randomly on the network and special termination of each
network channel is not required.
3. Field bus shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:
Specifications:
1) Class 2 communication bus.
2) Prefabricated one ft., five ft., ten ft., 15 ft., 20 ft., 25 ft. and 50 ft. lengths.
3) Daisy chain topology
4) Prefabricated with 2-wire connectors.
5) Flame rated jacket for plenum use NFPA 262 (UL: FT6, CSA: CMP).
6) Power Supply: 12 VDC (up to 24 VDC) to sensors.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 80 of 145
S. Conductors and Cables
1. Class 2 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller
than No. 18 AWG.
T. Lighting Control Panels
1. General
Addressing: All lighting control panels shall be individually addressable via Central
Control Software.
Communication: All lighting control panels shall communicate via the same
prefabricated, quick connecting low voltage wiring as all other devices.
Wiring: Relay control panels shall be interconnected on the same field bus as all
other system components.
U. Lighting Control System Software
1. Personal Control Software: Enables individuals in a building to control lighting levels in their
workspace from their own desktop PC. User can control the light level of each fixture in
their workspace or can control all of the fixtures together as a group. Preset lighting scenes
may be stored, recalled and modified. This software shall have the capability of acting as
a “virtual occupancy sensor” for the system by detecting keyboard or mouse activity on
each PC for incremental occupancy status data.
Technical Information:
1) TCP/IP network traffic < 2kb/s.
2. Web based Personal Control Software: This feature allows individuals to control lighting
levels in their workspace without the requirement for installation of software on client PCs.
Individuals can access the interface through the web browser and perform individual fixture
dimming control, on/off switching, modify and save preset lighting scenes.
3. Technical Information: Adobe Flash ® based user interface.
System Requirements:
1) Internet web browser with Flash® Player 8 or later.
2) Internet/Intranet connection.
3) SSU enabled and configured to host dynamic website.
4) Network connection with access to a network-enabled CU.
4. Web based Central Control Software: Central control software application is used to
commission, configure and manage the system. Every system parameter in a building (or
campus of buildings) is configured for each individual user or space and baseline settings
are established for each of the following (depending on the basis of design) system
features:
Daylight harvesting.
Occupancy control.
Smart time scheduling.
Task tuning.
Personal control.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 81 of 145
Load shedding.
1) Software utilizes a web based interface that permits a user to easily navigate
between zones, floors or different buildings and allows a user to zoom in or
zoom out of specific areas of a building. Both 3-dimensional and 2-
dimensional multi-floor views shall be available. System features such as
creation of zone hierarchies, overlapping and support zone definitions, user
access rights, timeout settings for occupancy sensors, calibration of light
levels for daylight harvesting and the configuration of multiple time schedule
profiles shall be available. A web based Graphical User Interface (GUI)
application integral to the system will be used to develop a dynamic, real-time,
point-and-click graphic of each floor plan with representation of all light
fixtures, lighting controllers, sensors, and switches. A central system server
will be provided to support system data base and enterprise control
management.
5. System Requirements:
Software must be able to run on a Windows Operating systems (Windows XP or
newer) and also on Apple Mac Intel PCs (Mac OS 10.4 or newer).
Must support all common browsers, i.e.,
1) Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
2) Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or later
3) Safari
4) Google Chrome
Network connection with access to network-enabled CUs.
Color gradient (“weather map” type) data view (see below for an example) shall be
available to display the following criteria:
1) Current energy consumption
2) Current energy savings
3) Current fixture brightness
4) Current fixture status
5) Current occupancy data
6) Current load shedding status
7) Other custom modes that may be specified elsewhere
V. Photo Sensor:
Photo sensors shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:
1. General Specifications:
Shall be Class 2, low voltage.
Ambient light sensor designed to interface directly with the analog input of the
Lighting Control System.
Sensor shall supply an analog signal to the ALCS proportional to the light measured.
Sensor output shall provide for zero or offset based signal.
Sensor shall be capable of a fully adjustable response in the range between 0 and
10,000 foot candles with a +/- 1 percent accuracy at 70 deg F.
Input: 10VDC.
Minimum Output: 0 VDC.
Maximum Output: 10 VDC.
Sensor housing shall be flame retardant and meet UL 94 HB standards.
Operating Temp: -10 deg C to 60 deg C.
The sensitivity adjustments shall be at sensor body, and outside of the sensor’s
viewing angle.
The sensor houding shall be flame retardant and meet UL 94HB standards
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 82 of 145
2. Interior:
Indoor sensors shall have a Fresnel lens, with a 60 degree cone of response. The
indoor sensor range shall be between 0 and 750 FC.
3. Exterior:
Outdoor models shall have a hood over the aperture to shield the sensor from direct
sunlight. The outdoor sensor circuitry shall be completely encased in an optically
clear epoxy resin. Outdoor sensors shall mount to a standard threaded 1/2 in.
conduit or fit a 1/2 in. knockout. The Outdoor sensor range shall be between 0 and
750 FC.
4. Atrium:
The Atrium sensors shall have a translucent dome with a 180 degree field of view.
Atrium sensor shall mount to a standard treaded 1/2 in. conduit or fit a 1/2 in.
knockout. Atrium sensor range shall be from 2 to 2,500 FC.
5. Skylight:
The Skylight sensors shall have a translucent dome with a 180 degree field of view.
Skylight sensor shall mount to a standard treaded 1/2 in. conduit or fit a 1/2 in.
Skylight sensor range shall e between 10 and 7,500 FC.
W. Occupancy Sensors
1. Environmental:
Operating Temperature Range: 0ºC to 40ºC
Relative Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing
Ceiling Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors
1) Sensing mechanism:
2) Dual technology (ultrasonic / passive infrared):
3) Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
4) Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz that shall be crystal
controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
5) Electrical: Rating: 12 VDC input voltage, up to 40 mA current draw.
6) Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time
delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space
7) Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular
work hours and habits.
8) Sensors shall be UL listed.
9) Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure
optimal lighting control for any use of the space
10) Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to
override any adaptive features. Sensor timeouts shall be configurable by
System software.
11) Power failure memory:
12) Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and
subsequently restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected
memory shall not be lost.
13) Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
14) Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.
15) Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.
16) Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling
mounted sensors using infrared technology. Field prepare proper maskings
for each space to eliminate unnecessary sensing beyond the space in which
the sensor is located.
17) Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally
Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and
other control options.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 83 of 145
X. Examination
1. Site Verification: Verify that wiring conditions, which have been previously installed under
other sections or at a previous time, are acceptable for product installation in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Inspection: Inspect all material included in this contract prior to installation. Manufacturer
shall be notified of unacceptable material prior to installation.
Y. Installation
1. The Electrical Sub-contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive,
mount, connect, and place into operation all equipment. The Electrical Sub-contractor shall
furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and other incidental items necessary for
properly functioning lighting control as described herein and shown on the plans (including
but not limited to System Field Devices, 0-10V dimming ballasts, fixed output ballasts, 0-
10V LED drivers and communication wire). The Electrical Sub-contractor shall maintain
performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.
2. Power: The contractor shall test that all branch load circuits are operational before
connecting loads to sensor system load terminals, and then de-energize all circuits before
installation.
3. Related Product Installation: Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections for related
products’ installation.
Z. Sensor Installation
1. Adjust sensitivity to cover area installed
2. Set time delay on occupancy sensors that are connected to the lighting control system to
the minimum. Time delays shall be controlled via Central Control Software.
3. Sensor shall be powered through Input Module. No external power packs shall be used
for powering sensors.
4. Install occupancy sensors on vibration free stable surface.
5. Install atrium and skylight light sensor facing toward window or skylight.
6. Install interior light sensor in ceiling facing the floor.
AA. Wiring Installation
1. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
2. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NEC & CEC. Separate power-limited and non
power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
BB. Software Installation
1. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies
of software and user-supplied values. Provide current site licenses for software.
CC. Field Quality Control
1. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test
and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
2. Perform the following field tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative:
Operational Test: After installing lighting controllers and sensors, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 84 of 145
3. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
4. Prepare test and inspection reports.
DD. Commissioning Requirements
1. Commissioning: The manufacturer shall supply factory trained representatives for a
minimum of 24 hours to commission the lighting control system. Manufacturer shall start
up all lighting control equipment and verify that it meets the requirements of this
specification.
2. Training: As part of the standard commissioning process, the manufacturer shall train the
owner’s representatives in the operation of the system to a maximum of 4 hours per
building. Manufacturer shall also provide owner’s representatives with system operating
manuals together with a system training video. Specific training on the operation of the
tunable white lighting shall be provided. In addition to the 4 hours an additional 4 hours of
training shall be provided for spaces utilizing tunable white light.
3. Technical Support: The manufacturer shall supply 24/7 technical telephone support to the
client. If the manufacturer does not provide 24/7 support, they must provide a list of
contacts (names and cell phone numbers) in the event of a system failure during non-
business hours.
4. Replacement components: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement parts within
24 hours for any component that fails during the warranty period.
5. Extended Service Coverage: Maintenance agreements shall be available from the
manufacturer to provide service for the system both during and after the warranty period.
6. Requests for commissioning shall be at least two weeks prior to date desired for
commissioning.
7. Electrical Sub-contractor shall perform functional testing under the guidance of
commissioning agent and in accordance with factory specified guidelines.
8. Factory appointed personnel shall provide commissioning services for the lighting control
system.
Verify proper communication over control wires.
Map addresses of occupancy sensors (via Input Modules), light level sensors (via
Input Modules), lighting controllers to control units and system server.
Map all system data to appropriate BACnet points and assist BMS sub-sub-
contractor in programming all points into the BMS system and verifying their proper
functionality.
Verify communication to control units and system server.
Configure occupancy sensors, light level sensors, lighting controllers and other
contacts to suit design specifications.
Configure and program lighting control sequences as described on contract
documents.
Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer proper operation of all areas the system is
installed.
EE. Testing
1. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are
installed and lamped, a qualified factory representative shall completely configure and test
the system.
2. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly
instructed in the proper operation of the system.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 85 of 145
FF. Demonstration
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel and building supervisors to adjust, operate, utilize, troubleshoot, conduct
software installation, and maintain lighting controls and software training for PC-based
control systems. Provide up to eight hours of on-site training with audio and video recorded.
Provide a hard copy of manuals, instructional videos, and recorded training session(s) on
CD or DVD.
2. Submit shop drawings indicating outline dimensions, connection and support points,
weight, specified ratings and materials.
3. Submit product data indicating standard model design tests and options.
4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
GG. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Submit operation and maintenance data under.
2. Include procedures for cleaning unit, and replacing components.
HH. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in distribution transformers with Five years
Documented experience.
LADDER TRAY/WIREWAYS
A. Provide aluminum ladder tray with 6 in. rung spacing with 4 in. side rail. Ladder tray shall be as
manufactured by B-Line. “Ladder Type”. Provide all hangers required. The width of the ladder
tray shall be as indicated on drawings.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
B-Line
Chalfant
Chatsworth
PW Industries
Or equal
B. Provide wireways for power and data where shown on drawings.
1. This specification covers NEMA type 1 wireway used to house ad protect communication
cable. The wireway system shall consist of wireway and appropriate fittings to complete
the installation per the electrical drawings.
2. Metal wireway (NEMA type 1) is to be utilized in dry interior locations only as covered in
article 362 part a of the national electrical code, as adopted by the national fire protection
association and as approved by the American National Standards Institute. The wiremold
“c” or “sp” series is listed by underwriters’ laboratories under file no. E137690 guide zoyx.
3. The wireway system specified herein shall be manufactured by the MP Husky. The size
of the cable maximum of 40 percent fill is allowed.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) MP Husky
2) Wiremold Company
3) Hoffman
4) Or equal
4. The wireway and all system components must be UL Listed in full compliance with their
standard UL870, “electrical wireways, auxiliary gutters and associated fittings”. It shall be
manufactured from 16-gauge cold rolled steel, finished in ASA 61 gray powder coat paint.
All sizes larger than 6 in. x 6 in. shall be manufactured from 14-gauge cold rolled steel,
finished in ASA 61 gray powder coat paint. A factory installed divider shall be available to
separate power and low voltage wring housed n the same wireway sections.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 86 of 145
5. A full complement of fittings for the raceway shall be available including, but not limited to,
45 deg, and 90 deg. flat, vertical inside and outside elbows, tee and cross fittings, couplings
for joining sections of wireway, reducers, hangers, end blanks, a field installed divider and
all other components necessary to make the system workable. The fittings shall have an
ASA 61 gray powder coat paint finish to match the wireway.
6. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout drawing containing all elements of
the system. Installer shall comply with detailed manufacturer’s instruction sheets which
accompany system components as well as complete system instruction sheets, whichever
is applicable.
7. All wireway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical boxes
and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation sheets.
8. All connections shall be checked to make sure they are correctly tightened and to insure
that all wireway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the national
electric code for proper grounding.
9. All wireway systems shall be installed complete. Work shall include fastening all wireway
and appropriate fittings to install a complete wireway system as indicated on the electrical
and/or communication drawings and in the applicable specifications
SEALS
A. Water Tight Seals:
1. Conduits entering from the exterior or below grade shall have water tight fittings on the
outside and on the inside of the conduit.
Fittings on the outside of the conduit shall be O-Z Gedney type FSK or approved
equal. Provide type WSK if penetration is within two feet of the high water table.
Provide grounding attachment.
Fittings on the inside of the conduit shall be O-Z Gedney type CSBI or approved
equal. Provide type CSBG if penetration is within two feet of the high water table.
Provide a blank fitting to seal spare or empty conduits.
O-Z Gedney type CSM fitting may be used when sealing within a sleeve or cored
hole.
2. Submit on seals to be used.
B. Environmental Seals:
1. Provide seals on raceways exposed to widely different temperatures, as in refrigerating or
cold storage areas. Install seal to prevent circulation of air from warmer to colder sections
through the raceway.
C. Hazardous Area Seals:
1. Provide explosion proof seals required by the Electric Code for the following areas.
Explosion proof exhaust fans.
D. Smoke and Fire Stopping Seals:
1. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 07 8413.
UNDERGROUND DUCTBANKS
A. General: Furnish and install the ductbanks as herein specified and as shown on drawings.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 87 of 145
B. Division of Work:
1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the work and material required for the
following:
Excavation
Backfill
Installation of handholes/manholes
Brick or concrete collars to bring handhole frames and covers up to grade.
Installation of frames and collars which are to be furnished by the Electrical
Subcontractor.
Concrete Encasement
2. All other material, equipment, and labor required for the complete ductbank shall be
furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor under this Section, including the
following:
Service raceways.
Grounding material.
Ductbank warning tape.
Furnishing pre-cast handholes/manholes.
Conduit spacers.
C. Materials:
1. Conduit: UL listed, schedule 40 PVC in accordance with NEMA standard TC-2. Schedule
EB PVC is accetpable where encased in concrete.
See BASIC MATERIALS SECTION.
2. Conduit Supports (duct system): Shall be molded plastic with interlocking lugs and
skeletonized structure, minimum separation 3 in.
3. Tags: Non-ferrous metal or fibre, 1/4 in. high letters.
4. Warning tape shall be yellow polyethylene 4 mil thick, 6 in. wide terratape, similar to REEF
Industries, Houston, Texas and shall be installed above all ductbanks both high and low
tension.
5. Installation of Underground nonmetallic raceways shall be in accordance with NEMA
Standards Publication TCB-2-2017.
D. Duct System:
1. The duct system shall consist of Schedule 40 PVC conduit except where otherwise
specified. The size and number of conduits shall be as indicated on the drawings. Provide
a pull wire in each conduit.
2. The entire length between handholes and end of ductbank shall be excavated and graded
before any conduit is laid.
3. The ductbank shall be set on undisturbed earth.
4. The conduit shall be installed so that top is a minimum of 36 in. below finished grade unless
otherwise indicated, and shall be laid to a minimum grade of 4 in. for each 100 feet of
length. Duct system shall drain to manholes/handholes.
5. Changes in direction shall be made by long sweep bends, minimum radius 25 feet except
that at the end of a run, within ten feet of termination. Manufactured ends may be used
having a minimum radius of 36 inches.
6. Conduit base and intermediate spacers shall be installed a maximum of 5 feet on centers.
Spacers shall not be placed one above the other, but shall be staggered a minimum of 6
in.
7. All conduit joints shall be made watertight by means of a sealing compound before the
coupling is installed. Joints in conduit shall be staggered, minimum space between joints
in adjacent conduit shall be 6 inches.
8. When the required number of conduits have been installed, securely tie the assembly
together at distances not exceeding 7 ft. Tie shall consist of three turns of No. 18 iron
wire. Separate ties required for low tension and high tension conduit runs.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 88 of 145
9. Duct envelope shall be vibrated to eliminate voids.
10. Ductbanks shall not be covered until the conduit installation has been observed by the
utility company and Architect.
11. Warning tape shall be installed during backfilling and shall be placed approximately 12 in.
above the conduits.
12. After the installation is completed, each conduit shall be cleaned and identified. A standard
flexible mandrel and a stiff bristle brush shall be pulled through each conduit. The mandrel
shall not be less than 12 in. long and the diameter approximately ¼ in. less than the conduit.
STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. Summary
1. Work Included: Packaged natural gas engine driven electric plant including engine
generator set, cooling system, fuel system, combustion air intake and engine exhaust
systems, starting system, and the following additional features:
Weatherproof and soundproof housing.
Automatic load transfer control to provide automatic starting and stopping of the
plant and switching of the load within 10 seconds.
Automatic transfer switches
Remote annunciator panel.
SPECIAL NOTE: Generator shall be warranted by manufacturer to develop full load
performance while operating at 7.0 to 11.0 inches of available gas pressure at the
inlet to the generator factory connection. Provide a 10 ft. exhaust stack for
generators rated 300KW and above.
2. Provide control and alarm circuits wiring as shown on the manufacturer’s diagrams and
required for a complete installation.
3. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, insurance, temporary protection,
supervision and incidental items which are usually provided with this equipment, or which
are essential for proper installation and operation, even though not these may not be
specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings.
B. REFERENCED STANDARDS
1. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association: NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
2. UL142 - Steel aboveground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids.
3. UL2200 – Stationary engine generator set assemblies.
4. Massachusetts DEP regulations and Federal EPA certification.
C. SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection
points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, automatic transfer
switches, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators,
radiator, enclosure and remote annunciator. Submit manufacturer's installation
instructions.
2. Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit complete shop drawings of the emergency generator
set and enclosure, including plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point
dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, and electrical diagrams,
including schematic and interconnection diagrams.
3. Test Reports: Submit certified copies of reports of factory testing required by this section.
4. Closeout Submittals: For inclusion the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1, provide the required number of copies of operating and maintenance
information, parts manuals, and schematic and wiring diagrams.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 89 of 145
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years experience.
2. NEMA Standards: Furnish and install motors to conform to NEMA MG1.
3. Code: Furnish and install emergency generator to comply with provisions of the referenced
Electrical Code.
E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1. Deliver, store, and protect products.
2. Accept packaged engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify
damage.
3. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.
F. WARRANTY
1. Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and installer of the emergency
generator equipment, agreeing to repair or replace at no cost to the Owner, equipment
which is defective either in material or workmanship.
Warranty Period: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion of phase 1 of
construction.
2. On-going system service and support shall be available from multiple factory certified
vendors. Include generator package the recommended service agreement for phase 1 and
phase 2 of the project. Provide recommended service agreement pricing at the time of bid
for post phase 2.
G. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
1. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator
system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
2. Provide two additional sets of each fuel oil, and air filter elements required for the engine
generator system.
H. Provide one 300 kW, 375 kVA at .8 PF standby power rated natural gas fueled generator set,
mounted in perfect alignment on an all welded, fabricated steel sub-base which shall allow for
attachment of all necessary engine and generator accessories.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Kohler
Caterpillar
Onan/Cummings
Generac
MTU Onsite Energy
Or equal
I. Engine
1. Water cooled with unit-mounted radiator. Provide starter and all field wiring required by
manufacturer
2. Dry-type replaceable element air cleaners.
3. Full flow lube oil filters and bypass oil filter.
4. Twelve volt starting motor, 12 volt, 3 ampere battery charging alternator.
5. Engine instrument panel to include ammeter, lube oil pressure gauge, lube oil temperature
gauge, water temperature gauge, and hour meter.
6. Engine-mounted safety control to provide alarm signals for engine shutdown in event of
low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, over speed, over crank, and pre-alarms for
high water temperature and low oil pressure.
7. Jacket water heater, 2000 watt, 120 or 208 volt, single phase or as recommended by
generator manufacturer.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 90 of 145
J. Generator: 300 kW, 375 kVA, 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM revolving field
type main generator with brushless exciter and permanent magnet.
Voltage regulation + 1 percent from no load to full load.
K. Cooling System: Unit mounted radiator with flange attached.
L. Starting System: 12 volt heavy duty lead acid storage battery, connected for 12 volt DC output.
M. Battery rack, cables, and connectors shall be provided.
N. Provide 10 amp battery charger fed from a 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz service. Battery charger
to include high and low battery voltage alarm relays for derangement panel. Battery charger shall
meet NFPA 110 Standards.
O. Exhaust System: Furnish one Maxim M-51 3 in. critical silencer, 3 in. side inlet, and one 3 in. end
outlet complete with two, 3 in. companion flanges. Furnish one 3 in. x 18 in. flexible stainless
steel exhaust connector, flanged on one end, threaded nipple on opposite end. Generator shall
meet all applicable emission standards.
P. Vibration Isolators: Set of four Korfund rubber type vibration isolators for installation between
steel base and concrete foundation.
Q. Generator Control Panel:
1. To completely control operation of engine generator set. Panel to have automatic start
control, AC volt meter, AC ammeter, pointer type frequency meter, volt meter, ammeter
and selector switch. Alarm signals to indicate pre-low oil pressure, pre-high coolant
temperature, and alarm signals to shut down engine in event of a low oil pressure, high
coolant temperature, engine over speed, or over crank. Lights on face of panel to indicate
failure. Provide dry contacts for remote disarrangement signal and louvers. Locate remote
annunciator in administration area.
2. Terminal strip shall be included with alarms and prewarning devices prewired for remote
annunciator specified herein. Provide wiring between generator and remote annunciator
panel. Generator control switch shall be mounted on control panel face. A flashing light
for selector switch "OFF" shall be included.
3. Provide molded case line circuit breakers mounted on generator in oversized terminal box.
4. Generator Overcurrent Protection: The generator set shall be provided with a UL
Listed/CSA Certified protective device that is coordinated with the alternator provided to
prevent damage to the generator set on any possible overload or overcurrent condition
external to the machine. The protective device shall be listed as a utility grade protective
device under UL category NRGU. The control system shall be subject to UL follow-up
service at the manufacturing location to verify that the protective system is fully operational
as manufactured. Protector shall perform the following functions:
Initiates a generator kW overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm
is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, or on overload conditions,
indicates an alarm conditions when the current flow is in excess of 110 percent of
rated current for more than 10 seconds.
Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, operates to switch off
alternator excitation at the appropriate time to prevent damage to the alternator.
The operator panel shall indicate the nature of the fault condition as either a short
circuit or an overload.
Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of
rated voltage to avoid overshoot greater than 120 percent of nominal voltage.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 91 of 145
R. Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Provide automatic transfer switches as shown on drawings for operation on 277/480 volts,
3 phase, 4 wire operation. Units to be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure and shall be 4 pole.
Transfer switches over 400 amperes shall have an AIC rating of 65,000 ARMS.
2. Transfer switches 400 amperes or less shall be rated for 42,000 ARMS and fed from a
current limiting breaker on the normal side.
3. Entire switch shall be listed under UL 1008.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Russ Electric
2) ASCO
3) Kohler
4) Or equal
4. Unit shall be provided with standard accessories as follows.
Voltage and Frequency Sensing:
5. Close differential voltage sensing on all phases of normal pickup adjustable 85-100
percent. Dropout 75-98 percent
6. Voltage sensing of emergency source. Adjustable pickup 85-100 percent.
7. Frequency sensing of emergency source. Adjustable pickup 90-100 percent.
Time Delays:
8. Time delay to override momentary normal source outages. Adjustable 0.5 to 6 seconds.
9. Retransfer to normal with 5 minute cooldown timer.
Engine Control:
10. Contact to close when normal source fails.
11. Contact to open when normal source fails.
12. Test switch to simulate normal source failure.
Indicators: Pilot lights to indicate switch in normal position or emergency position.
Auxiliary Contacts: Two to close on normal. Two to close on emergency.
13. Engine Start Control and Monitoring:
Contact to close when normal source fails.
Contact to open when normal source fails.
Test switch to simulate normal source failure.
The Engine Start Control and Monitoring Modules shall be ASCO 5101 Engine Start
Modules or approved equal. The solution must cover and provide complete
compliance to the 2020 NEC 700.10 code.
The ATS shall provide continuous monitoring of the entire remote start circuit.
Visual and audible annunciation of generator malfunction shall be initiated if the
integrity of the start circuit is compromised.
There shall be minimum time delay (less than 5 seconds) in annunciation of any
compromised condition such as an open or short circuit. A system which
annunciates compromised conditions only after a generator start signal is initiated
via a redundant path does not meet the intent of this specification.
The detection of a compromised start circuit shall initiate and latch the generator
start circuit.
Each Generator Engine Start Module shall be din-rail mounted and accept up to (8)
ATS Engine Start. Each channel must have its own dedicated tri-colored status
LED.
Each Engine Start channel must have its own dedicated switch with ability to enable
or disable monitoring function.
Engine-start circuit shall be a single pair of typical hardwire used in legacy
applications. Additional wiring and components beyond specified herein does not
meet the intent of this specification.
Coordinate placement of required components within the generator controls with the
specified manufacturers.
14. Indicators: Pilot lights to indicate switch in normal position or emergency position.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 92 of 145
15. Auxiliary Contacts: Two (2) to close on normal. Two (2) to close on emergency.
16. Optional Accessories:
Plant exerciser.
In-phase monitor (Motor Load Transfer). (ATS-OS)
Manual transfer to normal source.
Elevator control transfer module. A load control circuit consists of two sets of single
pole, double throw contacts that operate 3 seconds before transfer in either
direction. Contacts rated 3 amperes, 208 volts AC or 10 amperes, 32 VDC, for
signal to elevator of generator power available. Provide 2 #14AWG conductors in
3/4 in. conduit, interlock wiring to each elevator controller from each switch
controlling elevator power.
S. Remote Annunciator Panel: A flush mounted panel shall include a visual signal that battery
charger is functioning properly and both audible and visual signals. Annunciator shall meet NFPA
110 Standards.
T. Audible signal shall have a silencing switch. A lamp test button shall be provided.
U. Provide load bank test in the field by a factory certified representative for two hours at 25 percent,
50 percent, 75 percent and 100 percent load for 30 minutes at each stage and provide testing
documentation. Also, provide a two hour building load test transferring the ATS switches to
generator power. Provide an NFPA 110 test report for Engineer approval.
V. Provide remote emergency power off button on the generator external to the enclosure.
W. Proivde remote emergency power off button at fire command center integral to the remote
annunciator.
X. Miscellaneous: Necessary lube oil and anti-freeze.
Y. Equipment Testing and Instruction Manual and Drawings:
1. Operating instruction and maintenance manuals shall contain the following information:
Operating Instruction
Replacement Parts
Wiring Diagram
Maintenance
2. Factory test generator for four (4) hours, one hour each at 25 percent, 50 percent, 75
percent and 100 percent load. Take standard readings and submit test reports for approval
prior to shipment.
3. Perform field test with load bank at same ratings for 2 hours, in addition to the 2 hour load
test specified below. The field test should be performed at each phase of construction.
4. The entire emergency system shall be field test operated for two (2) hours. A normal power
failure shall be simulated. The engine generator unit shall automatically start, come up to
speed, and assume full emergency load.
5. Custodians of the equipment shall be present during test. At that time they shall be
instructed in operation and maintenance.
6. Upon completion of tests, written reports containing results shall be submitted. Test reports
shall contain readings taken at 30 minute intervals along with all other pertinent test
information.
Ambient Temperature
Oil Pressure
Battery Charge Rate
AC Volts
AC Amperes All Phases
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 93 of 145
Frequency
Kilowatts
Power Factor
Z. Coordination of Trades:
1. The following equipment shall be furnished by Electrical Contractor but shall be installed
under other sections.
Anchor bolts to be installed by General Contractor based on approved shop
drawings.
AA. REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
1. Provide a generator set remote alarm annunciator panel for installation at the location
shown on the drawings.
2. Enclose the panel in NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for flush wall mounting and provide
audible (A) and/or visual (V) signals for the following:
Condition Signal
1. Generator set operating V
2. Failed to start A/V
3. Pre-low lube oil pressure A/V
4. Pre-high water temperature A/V
5. Low water temperature A/V
6. Engine overspeed A/V
7. Low battery voltage V
8. High battery voltage V
9. Low fuel supply A/V
10. Fuel leak detection A/V
3. In the panel face, provide a separate lamp for each of the signals listed above, a lamp test
pushbutton switch, and an audible alarm signal device with silence switch having ring back
feature.
4. Provide a communication port to interface with the building management system for
transmitting the generator set status and alarms data including alarm on a generator set
failure to start automatic weekly exercise.
Supports industry-standard Modbus_RTU protocol.
Uses either an RS-232 or RS-485 Network port.
Communicates at baud rates up to 19200.
Allows selection of an access code for remote programming.
Remotely monitors system operation including run times, shutdowns, warnings, and
input/output activity.
Allows selection of either metric (SI) or English (IP) units.
Provides more than 100 different Modbus_message codes for system monitoring,
including System Ready and Generator Running.
Provides remote programming of most system parameters including time delays, trip
points, voltage, frequency, and current.
Allows remote engine start/stop and controller reset.
BB. EXECUTION
1. GENERAL
Install, align, set, support, and wire equipment in accordance with the contract
drawings, specifications and manufacturer’s installation manual..
Provide adequate temporary supports for the equipment during erection or
installation.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 94 of 145
2. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Provide services of a factory trained field engineer to inspect the installation, service
the engine with lube oil, the radiator with rust inhibitors, and supervise start of the
engine set and tests for all systems.
Test the equipment and controls after installation, under the supervision of a factory
trained engineer, and in the presence of the Architect and the Owner. Certify that
the equipment has been tested in accordance with NEMA MG-1 and meets the
minimum requirements of that specification.
Verify time delay settings of the automatic transfer switches. ATS serving life safety
(emergency) loads shall transfer to emergency without delay. Time delay on transfer
for the switches serving standby loads shall be set to satisfy the diesel-generator
starting kVA value.
Testing Procedure:
1) Check all systems to assure compliance with the manufacturer’s installation
drawings and wiring diagrams..
2) The load tests shall be with a resistance load bank and shall include:
a) 1 hour at 25 percent of rated load.
b) 1 hour at 50 percent of rated load.
c) 1 hour at 75 percent of rated load.
d) 1 hour at 100 percent percent of rated load.
3) Record at the beginning and end of the test the following parameters:
a) Engine oil pressure.
b) Engine oil temperature.
c) Engine exhaust temperature of exhaust manifold.
d) Jacket water temperature in and out.
e) AC voltage and amperage (all phases).
f) Frequency.
Simulate a power failure by transferring the entire load to the emergency power
system, and operating the fully-loaded emergency power system for a period of 1
hour.
Submit all required documentation for registration of generator with the DEP.
Provide NFPA 110 equivalent testing and provide test report to engineer for
approval.
3. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Instruct the operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the unit.
Provide at least one full day for instructing personnel an explaining the operator's
manual.
4. CLEANING AFTER TESTING
After completion of testing and adjustment of system, thoroughly clean all exposed
surfaces of emergency generator equipment to remove dirt, grease, fingerprints and
other contamination. Touch up damaged factory-applied finishes.
CC. MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH
1. Scope:
Electrical SubContractor shall furnish, deliver, install and test the manual transfer
switches as specified herein and in accordance with the drawings.
2. Quality Assurance:
Manual transfer switch shall be UL listed and labeled under the UL 1008 standard.
Manual transfer switch manufacturer shall provide a complete factory assembled,
wired and tested manual transfer switch.
Manual transfer switch shall be factory Hi-pot tested for a period of not less than 60
seconds.
Manual transfer switch installation shall meet all applicable NEC standards.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 95 of 145
3. Submittals:
Electrical SubContractor shall submit manufacturer’s drawings and data of manual
transfer switches for Engineer’s approval prior to start of fabrication. Drawings and
data shall include, as a minimum, dimensioned general arrangement drawings and
wiring diagrams, UL listing information including UL control or file number,
component data, mounting provisions, conduit entry locations and installation
instructions.
Upon installation of manual transfer switches Electrical SubContractor shall submit
manufacturer’s Operating & Maintenance Manual which shall include as a minimum:
1) Certified as-built General Arrangement drawings and Wiring Diagram.
2) Materials / Component List including part numbers.
3) Maintenance and service requirements.
4) Certificate of Compliance and hi-pot test data.
4. Warranty:
Manual transfer switches shall be covered by manufacturer’s warranty for a
minimum period of one year after shipment from manufacturer.
5. General:
All equipment shall be new.
Manual transfer switch manufacturer must have produced and sold manual transfer
switches as a standard product for a minimum of three years.
Manual transfer switches shall be molded case circuit breaker type; knife switch or
fused switches are not acceptable.
Electrical SubContractor shall be responsible for the equipment until it has been
installed and is finally inspected, tested and accepted in accordance with the
requirements of this Specification.
Manual transfer switches shall be StormSwitch, Model “SSDX-400A-H-400A-H-480-
3-1-1-D-C” as manufactured by ESL Power Systems, Inc. or equal as approved by
the Engineer.
6. Manual Transfer Switches:
Manual transfer switch shall consist of (2) two mechanically-interlocked molded case
circuit breakers, cam-style male connectors, power distribution block and grounding
terminals, all housed within a padlockable enclosure.
Manual transfer switch enclosure shall be Type 3R, constructed of continuous seam-
welded, powder coated galvanneal steel. The main access shall be through an
interlocked, hinged door that extends the full height of the enclosure. Access for
portable generator cables with female cam-style plugs shall be via cable entry
openings in the bottom of enclosure. A hinged flap door shall be provided to cover
the cable openings when cables are not connected; the hinged flap door shall allow
cable entry only after the main access door has been opened. Enclosure shall be
powder coated after fabrication; color shall be light gray RAL 7038.
Cam-style male connectors (inlets) shall be UL Listed single-pole separable type
and rated 400 amps at 600VAC. Cam-style male connectors shall be color coded.
Cam-style male connectors shall be provided for each phase and for ground, and
shall also be provided for neutral if required. Each of the phase cam-style male
connectors within the enclosure shall be factory-wired to a molded case circuit
breaker. The ground cam-style male connectors shall be bonded to the enclosure,
and a ground lug shall be provided for connection of the facility ground conductor.
The neutral cam-style male connectors, if required, shall be factory wired to a power
distribution block. None of the cam-style male connectors shall be accessible unless
both molded case circuit breakers are in the “OFF” position and the main access
door is open.
A power distribution block shall be provided for load-side field wiring. The power
distribution block shall be factory wired to the molded case circuit breakers.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 96 of 145
Molded case circuit breakers shall be UL Listed and the short circuit interrupt rating
shall be a minimum of 35kAIC at 480VAC. Trip rating of the molded case circuit
breakers shall be as shown on the drawings. One molded case circuit breaker shall
be fed from utility power; the other molded case circuit breaker shall be fed from the
cam-style male connectors to supply power from a portable generator. Both molded
case circuit breakers shall include UL Listed door-mounted operating mechanisms,
preventing the opening of the main access door unless both breakers are in the
“OFF” position. Both molded case circuit breakers shall be mounted behind a
deadfront panel. The load-side of the molded case circuit breakers shall not be
energizable unless the main access door is closed and one of the molded case
circuit breakers is in the “ON” position. The (2) molded case circuit breakers shall
be safety interlocked by mechanical means to ensure that only one breaker can be
closed at any given time.
Manual transfer switch shall be suitable for use as service equipment in the USA.
7. Installation:
Prior to installation of manual transfer switches, Electrical SubContractor shall
examine the areas and conditions under which the manual transfer switch is to be
installed and notify the Engineer in writing if unsatisfactory conditions exist.
Manual transfer switch shall be installed as shown on the drawings and per the
manufacturer’s written instructions. In addition, the installation shall meet the
requirements of local codes, the National Electrical Code and National Electrical
Contractors Association’s “Standard of Installation”.
Conduit entry into the manual transfer switch shall be by Electrical SubContractor;
Electrical SubContractor shall furnish and install listed watertight conduit hubs, as
manufactured by MYERS or T&B, for each conduit entry on the manual transfer
switch. The incoming hub size shall match the conduit size for feeders and ground
as shown on the drawings. The outgoing hub size shall match the conduit size for
loads and ground as shown on the drawings. Hubs shall be properly installed and
tightened to maintain Type 3R integrity of the manual transfer switch enclosure.
Electrical SubContractor shall terminate feeder conductors, load conductors and
ground per the manufacturer’s instructions. Use copper wire only for all conductors
and grounds. All field wiring terminations shall be torqued as required per the
instructions on the manual transfer switch’s power distribution block, circuit breaker
& ground lug.
8. Field Testing:
Prior to energizing manual transfer switch, the Electrical SubContractor shall
perform the following checks and tests as a minimum:
1) Verify mounting and connections are complete and secure.
2) Verify internal components and wiring are secure.
3) Perform continuity check of all circuits.
4) Perform 1,000 VDC megger test on feeder, load and ground cables.
5) Verify deadfront is secure.
6) With the manual transfer switch deadfront in place and the main access door
closed and properly latched, actuate both Operator Mechanisms; verify only
7) (1) breaker at a time can be turned to the “ON” position.
8) Confirm operation of the manual transfer switch ground receptacle by
attaching a plug to the manual transfer switch ground receptacle and then
verify that the plug is grounded to the facility ground.
9) Once utility power has been applied, confirm operation of manual transfer
switch by following directions on main access door.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 97 of 145
DD. Generator Outdoor Housing
1. The engine generating set shall be factory installed in a weatherproof outdoor housing.
The housing shall provide year round generating set protection against adverse weather
and environmental conditions. The enclosure shall be sound attenuated and meet Federal
Specifications.
2. The weatherproof shelter shall be constructed or welded and bolted reinforced aluminum,
14 gauge walls and 14 gauge floor plate. All metal parts shall be prime coated and finished
painted.
3. The shelter assembly shall have shuttered air openings on front and sides with mesh
screens covering side shutters. The air shutters shall be opened by four 22 volt AC motors
when the generating set operates. Motors shall be spring loaded to close shutters when
set stops.
4. Hinged double doors on each side and one door in rear of the shelter shall allow easy
access to engine generator and controls. All door handles shall be key lock design.
5. Vibration isolators of the open coil spring type, selected for 3 inch (76mm) static deflection,
shall be furnished and installed. The number of isolators shall be as recommended by the
generator set manufacturer, and complete details shall be included in the Submittals.
Anchor bolts, nuts and sleeves shall be supplied with recommended Foundation Plan.
6. The weatherproof housing shall allow installation of the silencer outside the enclosure.
Provide critical type silencer.
7. Provide sound deadening materials, baffles, hoods, to reduce noise levels to 75DBA at 7
meters in any direction.
8. Finish of housing to be selected by Architect.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A. General
1. This specification describes a continuous duty, three-phase, solid-state, static
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall
contain a full rated input rectifier / boost converter (hereafter referred to as Input Converter),
output inverter, and 10 percent battery charging circuit. The system shall also contain a
continuous duty bypass static switch, internal mechanical bypass, removable hot swap
battery plant, and LCD interface display. All of the above system components are housed
in a single enclosure. Maintenance bypass and extended battery is required to meet this
specification shall be contained in matching enclosures with all interconnecting cabling
included. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system
as described in this specification shall be provided as part of the UPS.
B. Standards
1. The UPS shall meet the requirements of the following standards:
2. IEEE 587-1980/ANSI C62.41 1980 Standards for Surge Withstand Ability.
3. FCC rules and regulations of Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.
4. UL listed under 1778, Standards for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment.
5. UL Canada (cUL).
6. NEMA PE 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Uninterruptible Power
Systems.
7. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) – Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
8. IEEE 519-1992 Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical
Power Systems
9. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
10. ISO 9001.
11. ISO 14001
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 98 of 145
12. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
C. Submittals
1. Submittals shall contain the following documentation:
Installation Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection
requirements. Provide cabinet dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and
weight; detailed equipment outlines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit
entry and exit; single-line diagram, control, and external wiring requirements; heat
rejection, full and part load efficiencies and air flow requirements.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical
data and electrical performance, electrical characteristics, and connection
requirements.
D. Warranty
1. UPS Module: The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty from the
manufacturer for a period of twelve months from date of installation or acceptance by
customer or eighteen months from date of shipment from the manufacturer, whichever
occurs first.
2. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final customer
and shall have a minimum period of one year.
E. Maintenance, Accessibility and Self Diagnostics
1. All UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS
design shall provide maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that
end, the UPS shall be equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation.
The self-test function shall identify the subassembly-requiring repair in the event of a fault.
The electronic UPS control and monitoring assembly shall therefore be fully
microprocessor based, thus doing away with all potentiometer settings. This shall allow:
2. Auto-compensation of component drift;
3. Self-adjustment of replaced subassemblies;
4. Extensive acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics (local or remote);
5. A socket for connection to a computer-aided diagnostics system.
6. The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no
adjustments or settings. Communication with a remote maintenance system shall be
possible.
F. System Description and Operation
1. Manufacturer(s): The specified equipment shall be manufactured by American Power
Conversion (APC) in compliance with specifications. Liebert or Mitsubishi are approved
equals.
2. UPS Design Requirements.
Output Power Continuous Rating: The continuous output power rating of the UPS
shall be shall be 24KW/30KVA at a 0.8 lagging power factor.
Input Voltage: 208 VAC – 25 percent / +15 percent, 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
Output voltage: 208 VAC 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
Battery Autonomy: The UPS shall have battery strings such that it shall be capable
of operating at full load for 7 minutes at 0.8 PF output at a temperature of 25 deg.C
on battery power.
Battery Type: Hot swappable valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA).
3. AC Input Characteristics.
Input Frequency: 60 Hz (- 25 percent to + 15 percent)
Maximum Input Current at Low Line Voltage: rated amps with 125 percent
continuous overload.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 99 of 145
Input Power Factor: > .98 lagging for loads greater than 50 percent and > .95 for
loads greater than 15 percent.
Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Wave Form: less than 5 percent at full load.
Power walk-in: Linear 0 to 100 percent over a 15-second period.
Magnetizing Inrush Current: Less than nominal input current for less than one cycle.
4. AC Output Characteristics.
Voltage Regulation: + 1.0 percent for balanced load; + 1.75 for 50 percent
unbalanced load; + 2.5 percent for 100 percent unbalanced load
Frequency: 60 Hz +1 percent (or selectable up to 4 percent). 60 Hz + 0.1 percent
when free running.
Voltage Distortion: Maximum 2 percent total (THD) and 1 percent any single
harmonic on 100 percent linear loads.
Voltage Transient (Step Load) Response:
+ 3 percent for 50 percent step load change
+ 5 percent for 100 percent step load change
+ 1 percent for loss or return of AC input power or manual transfer at full load.
Voltage Recovery Time: Return to within 1 percent of nominal value within 50
milliseconds.
Phase Angle Displacement: 120 deg. + 1 deg. degrees for balanced load; 120 deg.
+ .3 deg. degrees for 100 percent unbalanced load
Non-Linear Load Capability: Output voltage total harmonic distortion shall be less
than 3 percent when connected to a 100 percent non-linear load with a crest factor
not to exceed 3.0.
Slew Rate: 1 Hz/second maximum (or selectable up to 2.0 Hz/sec).
Power Factor: 0.8 at the rated volt-amperes (VA)
Inverter Overload Capability:
120 percent of rated load for 1 minute
145 percent of rated load for 30 seconds
Bypass Overload Capability: > 800 percent for 500 milliseconds, 125 percent
continuous.
Overall AC to AC efficiency with fully charged battery 93.5 percent at full load and
92.5 percent at 50 percent load.
5. DC Bus.
Normal DC voltage 192VDC.
Maximum DC current at cutoff voltage will be 29 A.
End of discharge 152VDC
6. Modes of Operation.
The UPS module shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on-line reverse
transfer system in the following modes.
Normal: The input converter and output inverter shall operate in an on-line manner
to continuously regulate power to the critical load. The input and output converters
shall be capable of full battery recharge while simultaneously providing regulated
power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range of the UPS
specifications.
Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being
supplied by the output inverter, which shall derive its power from the battery system.
There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load during both transfers to
battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output
inverter shall simultaneously recharge the battery and provide regulated power to
the critical load.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 100 of 145
Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide transfer of critical load
from the Inverter output to the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer,
shall take place with no power interruption to the critical load. In the event of an
emergency, this transfer shall be an automatic function.
Internal Mechanical Bypass: As a standard feature, the UPS shall be equipped with
an internal, make before break, bypass switch. This switch shall mechanically
bypass the UPS for times where maintenance is required.
7. Component Description.
Rectifier / Battery Charger
The input power converters of the system shall constantly control the power
imported from the mains input of the system, to provide the necessary UPS power
for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and Main Inverter
regulated output power.:
1) Soft-Start Operation: As a standard feature, the UPS shall contain soft-start
functionality, capable of limiting the input current from 0-100 percent of the
nominal input over a default 15 second period, when returning to the AC utility
source from battery operation. The change in current over the change in time
shall take place in a linear manner throughout the entire operation. (di/dt=
constant)
2) Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDI shall be held
to 5 percent or less at full system, while providing conditioned power to the
critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady-state operating
conditions. This shall be true while supporting loads of both a linear or non-
linear type. This shall be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic
devices, or other components.
3) The input converter shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to
150 percent of the UPS output. During conditions where input current limit is
active, the UPS shall be able to support 100 percent load, charge batteries at
10 percent of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains
deviation of up to +/-15 percent of the nominal input voltage
4) Modular Assembly: The rectifier/battery charger assembly shall be
constructed of modular design to facilitate rapid maintenance.
5) Charging Levels: The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of
+/- 220v, +/-1 percent
6) Battery Charge Current Limit: The UPS shall be capable of limiting the energy
sourced from the mains for purposes of battery charging. As a default setting,
the battery charge energy will be set to 100 percent of its nominal value. When
signaled by a dry contact, (such as from an emergency generator) the UPS
shall be capable of limiting the battery charge energy taken from the mains.
This shall take place in user selectable increments of 75 percent, 50 percent,
25 percent, 10 percent and 0 percent of the nominal charge power. The
selection shall be made from the UPS front panel display/control unit.
7) Temperature Compensated Charging: The battery charger shall be equipped
with a temperature probe to enable temperature compensated charging and
adjust the battery float voltage to compensate for the ambient temperature
using a negative temperature coefficient of 3 mV per cell per degree Celsius
at a nominal temperature of 25 deg.C.
8) Capacity: The rectifier/battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support
a fully loaded inverter and fully recharge the battery to 95 percent of its full
capacity within 6-8 hours.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 101 of 145
Inverter.
The UPS output shall be derived from a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) IGBT
inverter design. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise
output power characteristics (specified in section 2.2.C) while operating over the
battery voltage range. The inverter assembly shall be constructed as a modular
assembly to facilitate rapid maintenance.
Static Bypass.
As part of the UPS, a system static bypass switch shall be provided. The system
static bypass shall provide no break transfer of the critical load from the Inverter
output to the static bypass input source during times where maintenance is
required, or the inverter can not support the critical bus. Such times may be due to
prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure.
8. Uninterrupted Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the
bypass source to assume the critical load without interruption after the logic senses one of
the following conditions:
Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.
Battery protection period expired and bypass current is available.
Inverter failure.
9. Interrupted Transfer: If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, the UPS
will make an interrupted transfer (not less than 500 msec. in duration).
Bypass voltage greater than + 10 percent, -10 percent from the UPS rated output
voltage.
Bypass frequency greater than + 2 Hz from the UPS rated output frequency.
10. Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall
automatically forward transfer power from the bypass to the rectifier / inverter, without
interruption, after the UPS inverter is turned "ON", after an instantaneous overload-induced
reverse transfer has occurred and the load current returns the UPSs nominal rating or less.
11. Manual Transfer: A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the UPS Control Panel by
turning the UPS inverter off.
12. Overload Ratings: The static bypass transfer switch shall have the following overload
characteristics after which time a thermal protection device will engage to protect the static
bypass.
800 percent of UPS output rating for 0.5 seconds (one cycle).
150 percent for 30 seconds.
125 percent of UPS output rating continuous.
13. Microprocessor Controlled Logic.
The full UPS operation shall be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled
logic. All operation and parameters are firmware controlled, thus eliminating the need
for manual adjustments or potentiometers. The logic shall include a self-test and
diagnostic circuitry such that a fault can be isolated down to the printed circuit assembly
or plug-in power assembly level. Every printed circuit assembly or plug-in power
assembly shall be monitored. Diagnostics shall be performed via a PC through the local
diagnostics port on the UPS.
14. Standard Communication Panel.
The UPS will include a standard easy to use communication panel. Included will be a
backlit, color graphic animated LCD display, LED’s and audible indicators for UPS On
line, UPS fault, UPS on battery and UPS off line. The UPS communication panel will
include UPS “ON” and UPS “OFF” pushbuttons that will permit the user to safely
command the UPS on or off without risk of load loss.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 102 of 145
G. System Controls and Indicators
1. Display Unit: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on the front of the
system. The display shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED,
and a keypad consisting of pushbutton switches. The following metered data, shall be
available on the alphanumeric display:
Measurements, status indications and events.
Bar-graphs and waveforms of the measured values.
Personalization menu protected by a password, used to make specific settings.
Event log with time stamping.
Access to all measurements.
System Parameters Monitored (data displayed): The visual display will display the
following system parameters based on true RMS metering:
Measurements:
1) Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second of occurring events.
2) Source Input Voltage
3) Input Frequency
4) Output AC voltage
5) Output AC current
Status indications and events:
1) Static bypass switch on
2) EPO Active
3) Mechanical bypass activated
4) External bypass switch (Q3) activated
5) Battery discharged
6) Return from low battery
7) Low battery
8) Load not powered from UPS
9) UPS in bypass
10) Runtime calibration aborted
11) Runtime calibration started
12) Runtime calibration complete
13) Battery self test aborted
14) Battery self test started
15) Battery self test completed
16) Number of battery modules decreased
17) Number of battery modules increased
18) Fan fault
19) SBS fault
20) System not in sync.
21) Bypass not available, frequency/voltage out of range
22) Mains voltage/frequency out of range
23) Site wiring fault
24) Low battery voltage shut down
25) Defective battery detected
26) Runtime is below alarm threshold
27) Load is above alarm threshold
28) Battery over-voltage warning
29) Battery over-temperature warning
30) Emergency power supply fault
31) Output overloaded
Display of operating curves: The graphical display shall be capable of displaying
curves and bar graphs of the above-mentioned measured values for significant
periods.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 103 of 145
Time-stamped historical events: This function shall time-stamp and store all
important status changes, anomalies and faults and make this information available
for automatic or user-requested consultation; it shall interpret the events and indicate
remedial measures if applicable.
2. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use
of the display unit. Pushbutton membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
Silence audible Alarm
Set the alphanumeric display language
Display or set the date and time
Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
Test battery condition on demand
Set intervals for automatic battery tests
Adjust set points for different alarms
Program the parameters for remote shutdown.
3. Front Panel Interface: The following shall make up the UPS front panel user interface.
Load On When Green, this LED indicates the load is being supported by the UPS
output
On Battery When Yellow, this LED indicates the UPS is running from Battery power
Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
bypass/mechanical bypass
Bypass When Yellow, this LED indicates the load is being supported by static
bypass/mechanical bypass
4. Push Button User Controls
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Help Key
Escape Key
Enter Key
5. Emergency Power Off (EPO): The UPS shall be equipped with a local emergency power
off button and dry contact input that can be used to command UPS shut down remotely.
Activation of this command shall lead to the following actions:
inverter shutdown
opening of the static bypass switch and the battery circuit breaker
opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable relay board
RJ-45 Interface port for remote communications with a network via web browser or
SNMP, or APC InfraStruXure Manager. Provide Communication card and software
licenses to perform Advanced power actions including but not limited to Load
shedding, shutdown of targeted virtual machines, migrate virtual machines to
targeted hosts, Automatic VM group assignment, Shutdown VMware vApp,
Automate VMware SRM Recovery plan, Fully virtualized cluster shutdown, and
VMware vSAN shutdown.
6. Dry Contacts: The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay
board. This board shall have 8 dry contacts, i.e. 6 for input signals and 2 for output signals.
Contacts shall be programmed as:
Low battery
Load on battery power
Load on automatic bypass
Load on UPS
Common Fault
UPS Off
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 104 of 145
The contacts will be programmable normally open or normally off and will change
state to indicate the operating status. The contacts will be rated at 2.0 A (250 VDC
/ 30 VDC).
H. Mechanical Design and Ventilation
1. Enclosure: The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure with dead front
construction. The mechanical structure of the UPS shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to
withstand handling and installation operations without risk. Access to UPS subassemblies
shall be through the front or top. The sheet-metal elements in the structure shall be
protected against corrosion by a suitable treatment, such as zinc electroplating,
bichromating, epoxy paint or an equivalent.
2. Cable Access: The standard UPS shall accommodate top or bottom entry cables.
3. Cabinet Weights and Dimensions: The width of the UPS System is 32.8 (in Inches) and
has an approximate weight of 1050 lbs.
4. Ventilation and Heat Rejection: The UPS shall be designed for forced air-cooling. Air inlets
shall be provided from the front bottom of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from
the top rear portion of the unit. Full load heat rejection is 4777 BTU /hour.
I. Battery
1. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot
swappable, fused, battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored to determine
the highest battery unit temperature for use by the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature
compensated charger circuitry.
2. The battery jars housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve
Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) type.
3. The UPS shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the
health of each removable battery module. This system shall notify the user in the event
that a failed or weak battery module is found.
J. Accessories
1. External Control and Communications Devices
The following control and communications devices shall be provided in the UPS
module.
2. Network Adaptor:
The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network management
systems (NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments.
The management information base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar"
formats. The SNMP interface adaptor shall be connected to the UPS via the RS232
serial port on the standard communication interface board.
The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully
shutting down one or more operating systems during when the UPS is on reserve
mode.
The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means
of serial communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems
during an on battery situation.
3. Remote UPS Monitoring
The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as
Internet Explorer.
RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or
contact closure signals from the UPS.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be
possible through a standard MIB II compliant platform.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 105 of 145
K. Factory Assisted Start-Up
1. Factory trained service personnel shall perform the following inspections, test procedures,
and on-site training:
Visual Inspection:
1) Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2) Verify installation per manufacturer’s instructions.
3) Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4) Inspect Battery Units.
5) Inspect Power Module(s).
Mechanical Inspection:
1) Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal power
wiring connections.
2) Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws,
nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
Electrical Inspection:
1) Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
2) Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
3) Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
4) Verify voltage of all battery modules.
5) Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
Site Testing:
1) Ensure proper system start-up.
2) Verify proper firmware control functions.
3) Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
4) Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
5) Verify system set points.
6) Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
7) Simulate utility power failure.
8) Verify proper charger operation.
9) Document, sign, and date all test results.
2. On-Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for
site personnel shall include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown
procedures, maintenance bypass and AC disconnect operation and alarm information.
L. Field Quality Control and Service Organization
1. Field Service Engineer Qualifications
The manufacturer must employ a 7 X 24 nation wide field service organization with
rapid access to all regions of the nation. The responding service professionals must
be factory-trained engineers with an accredited and proven competence to service
three phase UPS systems.
2. Spare Parts
Field Engineers must have immediate access to recommended spare parts with
additional parts storage located in regional depots. Additional spare parts shall be
accessible on a 7 x 24 basis from the national depot and must be expedited on a
next available flight basis or via direct courier (whichever mode is quickest).
3. Maintenance Training
The manufacturer shall make available to the customer various levels of training
ranging from basic UPS operation to UPS maintenance.
4. Maintenance and Service Contracts
The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service
contracts covering both the UPS system and the battery bank. Accredited
professional service engineers, employed exclusively in the field of critical power
systems service shall perform all maintenance and service. The manufacturer shall
also offer extended warranty contracts.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 106 of 145
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. SUMMARY
1. Furnish all labor, components and items of service required for the completion of a
functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system.
2. If any departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the contractor,
submit details of such departures and reasons as soon as possible to the architect for
approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the
architect.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Applied Research Laboratories, Inc. (ARL) shall list the
components and provide certification of the lightning protection system installation (inspect
and certify) for compliance with UL 96A and NFPA 780 standards.
2. The system shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved
design.
3. All components specified for this work shall be manufactured by Heary Bros. Lightning
Protection Co., Inc., Springville, New York, or equal. Thompson Lightning Protection,
Harger, East Coast Lightning Protection or Robbins Lightning are considered equals.
C. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit complete shop drawings, showing the type, size, cable routings, ground rods and
locations of all equipment, to the architect for approval, prior to start of work.
2. Submit samples and pertinent catalog data to the architect for approval upon request.
D. PRODUCTS
1. All equipment shall be new, the product of a single manufacturer as outlined above, and of
a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with
accepted industry standards.
E. EQUIPMENT
1. All components shall be aluminum and of the size, weight and construction to suit the
application where used in accordance with requirements for Class I structures.
2. Roof conductors shall be aluminum, 24 strands 14-gauge, 98,600 circular mils, net weight
110 lbs. / 1000 ft.
3. Down conductors shall be copper, 29 strands 17-gauge, 65,600 circular mils, net weight
190 lbs./1000ft.
4. Air terminals shall be solid round aluminum 1/2 in. x 12 in. minimum, and shall project 10
in. minimum above the object to be protected.
5. Mid-roof air terminals shall be solid round aluminum ½ in. x 48 in. minimum, and shall be
supported with a tripod brace.
6. Air terminal bases shall be aluminum with bolt pressure cable connectors and shall be
securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts.
Offset type bases shall be used at parapets and secured with stainless steel screws
or anchors.
Adhesive type bases shall be secured with an adhesive compound which is
compatible with the roofing system. The roofing manufacturer shall approve the
adhesive compound.
7. Ground rods shall be 5/8 in. x 10 ft.-0 in. minimum. They shall be connected to the system
with a two-bolt copper clamp having a minimum length of 1-1/2 in. and employing stainless
steel cap screws.
8. Cable fasteners shall be substantial in construction, galvanically compatible with the
conductor and mounting surface.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 107 of 145
9. Bonding devices, cable splicers and connectors shall be of aluminum with bolt pressure
cable connectors.
10. Equipment on stacks and chimneys shall be protected from corrosion and sized in
accordance with requirements.
11. Bolts, nuts and screws shall be stainless steel.
F. INSTALLATION
1. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer. The installer shall work
under the direct supervision of a manufacturer as listed above or a qualified distributor of
such manufacturer’s products.
2. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most inconspicuous
manner possible.
3. Provide complete cable network on the roof including; air terminals, splices, bonding
connectors and cable downleads to ground rods. Down conductors shall run in 1 in. PVC
conduit concealed within the building construction to ground.
4. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all necessary PVC conduit and junction
boxes.
5. A bimetal transition fitting shall be used where aluminum roof conductor and copper down
conductor are spliced together.
G. COORDINATION
1. Work with other trades to insure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation.
2. Assure a sound bond to the main water service and to assure interconnection with other
building ground systems, including both telephone and electrical.
3. Install proper arresters on the power and telephone service by either the utility or the
electrical contractor as applicable.
H. COMPLETION
1. Provide an as-built drawing to the architect, for the owner, upon completion of the
installation.
I. INSPECTION AND LISTING LABORATORY
1. Applied Research Laboratories, Inc. or
2. Underwriters Laboratories
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide firestopping at all new and existing fire-rated construction where penetrated by
the Work of this Section.
B. Refer to Section 078400 - Firestopping, for all product requirements for maintaining integrity of
fire-rated construction at penetrations.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 108 of 145
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. The variable frequency drives (VFD's) shall be solid state, with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
output waveform (VVI, six-step, and current source drives are not acceptable). The VFD package
as specified herein shall be enclosed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested
by the manufacturer. The VFD shall employ a full wave rectifier (to prevent input line notching),
DC Line Reactor, capacitors, and Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT's) as the output
switching device (SCR's, GTO's and Darlington transistors are not acceptable). The drive
efficiency shall be 97 percent or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental power factor shall
be 0.98 at all speeds and loads.
B. Specifications at 480 volts:
1. Input VAC +/-10 percent (capable of operation to 550 VAC), 3 phase, 48-63Hz. Output 0
- Input Voltage, 3 phase, 0 to 500 Hz for drives up to 75 HP; 0 to 120 Hz for drives over 75
HP. Operation above 60 Hz. shall require programming changes to prevent inadvertent
high speed operation. Environmental operating conditions: 0 to 40 C @ 3 kllz switching
frequency, 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95 percent humidity, non-condensing.
Units shall be UL, CUL and CA approved.
C. All VFD's shall have the following standard features:
1. All VFD's shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, keypad and
customer connections; regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad is to be used for local
control, for stepping through the displays and menus.
2. The VFD shall give the user the option of either (1) displaying a fault, (2) running at a
programmable preset speed, (3) hold the VFD speed based on the last reference revised,
or (4) cause a Warning to be issued, if the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is lost; as
selected by the user. The VFD shall provide a programmable relay output for customer
use to indicate the loss of reference condition.
3. The VFD's shall utilize plain English digital display (code numbers and letters are not
acceptable). The digital display shall be a 40-character (2 line X 20 characters/line) LCD
display. The LCD shall be backlit to provide easy viewing in any angle. All set-up
parameters, indications, faults, warnings and other information must be displayed in words
to allow the user to understand what is being displayed without the use of a manual or
cross-reference table.
4. The VFD's shall utilize pre-programmed application macro's specifically designed to
facilitate start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all
parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming
time.
5. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an overcurrent, overvoltage, or
loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial time, and time
between reset attempts shall be programmable. If the time between reset attempts is
greater than zero, the time remaining until reset occurs shall count down on the display to
warn an operator that a restart will occur.
6. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and accelerate
or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start).
7. The VFD shall be equipped with an automatic extended power loss ride-through circuit
which will utilize the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Minimum power loss
ride-through shall be one-cycle, based on full load and not inertia. Removing power from
the motor is not an acceptable method of increasing power loss ride-through.
8. The customer terminal strip shall be isolated from the line ground.
9. Prewired 3-position Hand-Off-Auto switch and speed potentiometer. When in "Hand", the
VFD will be started, and the speed will be controlled from the speed potentiometer. When in "Off", the VFD will be stopped. When in "Auto", the VFD will start via an external contact
closure, and its speed will be controlled via an external speed reference.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 109 of 145
10. The drive shall employ three current limit circuits to provide trip free operation.
11. The Slow Current Regulation limit circuit shall be adjustable to 125 percent (minimum) of
the VFD's variable torque current rating. This adjustment shall be made via the keypad,
and shall be displayed in actual amps, and not as percent of full load. The Rapid Current
Regulation limit shall be adjustable to 170 percent (minimum) of the VFD's variable torque
current rating. The Current Switch-off limit shall be fixed at 255 percent (minimum,
instantaneous) of the VFD's variable torque current rating. The overload rating of the drive
shall be 110 percent of its variable torque current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, and
140 percent of its variable torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 seconds, input line
fuses standard in the drive enclosure. VFD shall have a DC Line Reactor to reduce the
harmonics to the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor.
12. The VFD shall be optimized for a 4 kHz carrier frequency to reduce motor noise and provide
high system efficiency. The carrier frequency shall be adjustable by the start-up engineer
in ACH 501 units. The VFD shall have a manual speed potentiometer in addition to using
the keypad as a means of controlling speed manually.
D. All VFD's to have the following adjustments:
1. Five programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from continuously
operating at an unstable speed.
2. PI Setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow signal to
be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control.
3. Two programmable analog inputs shall accept a current or voltage signal for speed
reference or for reference and actual (feedback) signals for PI controller. Analog inputs
shall include a filter; programmable from 0.01 to 10 seconds to remove any oscillation in
the input signal. The minimum and maximum values (gain and offset) shall be adjustable
within the range of 0-20 MA and 0-10 Volts. Additionally, the reference must be able to be
scaled so that maximum reference can represent a frequency less than 60 Hz, without
lowering the drive maximum frequency below 60 Hz.
4. Six programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices.
One digital input is to be utilized as a customer safety connection point for fire, freeze, and
smoke interlocks (Enable). Upon remote, customer reset (reclosure of interlock), drive is
to resume normal operation.
E. The following operating information displays shall be standard on the VFD digital display. The
display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable):
1. Output Frequency
2. Motor Speed (RPM, percent or Engineering units)
3. Motor Current
4. Calculated Motor Torque
5. Calculated Motor Power
6. DC Bus Voltage
7. Output Voltage
8. Heatsink Temperature
9. Analog Input Values
10. Keypad Reference Values
11. Elapsed Time Meter
12. kWh meter
F. Speed Command Input shall be via:
1. Keypad.
2. Two Analog inputs, each capable of accepting a 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-10V, 2-10V signal.
Input shall be isolated form ground, and programmable via the keypad for different uses. 3. Floating point input shall accept a three-wire input from a Dwyer photohelic (or equivalent
type) instrument.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 110 of 145
G. Accessories to be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer.
1. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip-provide a separate terminal strip for connection of
freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external interlocks and
start/stop contacts shall remain fully functional whether the drive is in hand, Auto or Bypass.
2. All wires to be individually numbered at both ends for ease of troubleshooting.
3. Door interlocked thermal magnetic circuit breaker which will disconnect all input power from
the drive and all internally mounted options. The disconnect handle shall be thru-the-door
type, and be padlockable in the "Off" position.
4. Manual transfer to line power via contactors. Include motor thermal overload and fuse or
circuit breaker protection while in bypass operation. A three position selector switch to
control the bypass contactor and the drive output contactor is to be mounted on the
enclosure door. When in the "Normal" mode, the bypass contactor is open and the drive
output contactor is closed. In the "Test" position both contactors are open, and in the
"Bypass" position, the drive output contactor is open, and the bypass contactor is closed.
The drive output contactor shall also open when a stop command is given, isolating the
motor from the drive. Start/stop signals and safety interlocks will work in drive and bypass
modes.
5. Pilot or LED’s lights shall be provided for indication of "Normal" operation, "Bypass"
operation, and "External Fault". All pilot lights shall be push-to-test type.
6. Service contactor (drive input contactor) which provides the ability to service the drive
(electrically isolate the drive while in bypass operation without having to remove power
from the motor). The service contactor shall open when the drive is switched to bypass,
and also be controlled by a switch which is mounted inside the drive enclosure so that its
access is limited to service personnel only.
7. A class 20 bimetallic thermal motor overload relay shall be provided to protect the motor in
bypass.
H. Compliance to IEEE - 519
1. The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations specified to this installation showing that
the Total harmonic Distortion for the VFD's, reflected into the electrical distribution system
is limited to the level defined by IEEE - 519 (latest edition) for general systems. Harmonic
analysis shall be included with VFD submittal for approval by the engineer.
2. The VFD manufacturer shall conduct on site harmonic measurements before and after start
up of the VFD's. Results of the measurements, showing harmonic contribution of the
VFD's, shall be provided to the engineer one month after start up.
3. Three phase A. C. input line reactors shall be provided as a minimum, with all VFD's. The
line reactors are to provide attenuation of line side voltage transients, thus preventing
overload trips or other unnecessary V.F.D. shutdown, and provide a reduction in harmonic
distortion.
4. Line reactors shall have the following requirement:
Provide of 3 percent impedance line reactor.
150 percent continuous current rating for one minute.
Saturation rating no less than 2.5 times the continuous current rating.
U.L. recognized.
I. General: Install variable frequency drives where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
published installation instructions, complying with recognized practices to ensure that variable
frequency drives comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
J. Access: Provide access space around control panels for service as indicated, but in no case less
than that recommended by manufacturer.
K. Support: Install drive control panels on walls where indicated on drawings. Provide necessary
Unistrut and structural steel to provide adequate support as required by manufacturer.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 111 of 145
L. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
M. Start-Up
1. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service
center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to
the owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer.
N. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Alignment: Check compatibility of control panel to motor and where necessary, adjust
frequency and provide necessary filters to assure noise free operation of motors. Verify
response from control panel to motor to assure turn down ratio specified and that static
pressure signals are being received and that drives are controlling as specified and within
recommended tolerances by manufacturer. Provide start-up report prepared by
manufacturer’s representative to assure operation is as specified.
2. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
O. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Allen – Bradley
2. ABB
3. Siemens
4. Square D
5. Or equal
STAGE LIGHTING AND DIMMING SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor, herein referred to as the EC, shall provide all labor, materials, services,
and equipment to set, install, interconnect, and test the dimming and control systems as shown
on the drawings and as specified herein for all auditorium, black box theater, and TV studio
spaces Drawings, specifications, and other related documents shall apply to all work.
B. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Installation of wiring devices, back boxes, panels, conduits, wiring, dimmer racks and
modules, signal cables, DMX splitters, and architectural processor provided by others,
including:
Division of Responsibilities Electrical Contractor
Stage Lighting Contractor,
Sections 26 0953
ITEM Furnish Install Furnish Install
High voltage conduit and wire (Line Voltage) X X
High Voltage wire terminations X X
High voltage wire testing and labeling X X
Stage Emergency Lighting Transfer switch X X
Installation of stage ECR rack and power X X
Conduit for ECR rack low voltage devices X X
Labeling back boxes and conduit X X
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 112 of 145
Dimming System Low voltage conduit and back
boxes X X
Low voltage wire for dimming system X X
Termination of Dimming system low voltage wire X X
Dimming System Control wire continuity, testing
and labeling X X
Low voltage wire for Fire alarms, security or other X X
Conduit, raceways and interconnecting boxes X X
Junction Boxes X X
Provide power feed and termination to Batten
Hoists X X
Provide conduit for batten hoist controls X X
Mount Batten hoist control stations X X
Low voltage wire and controls for batten hoists X X
Dimmer Racks or cabinets X X
Provide terminations for all dimmer load circuits X X
Control Devices X X
Architectural Control - House lighting back boxes X X
Circuit Distribution Raceways and Boxes X X
Mounting of Stage Circuit Raceways to battens X X X
Lighting Fixture Installation and testing X X
Lighting Fixture Focus X X
Lighting Initial programming X X
2. Coordination with the System Integrator for a complete theatrical dimming system.
3. All power distribution devices, conduit and wire as required in this Section and related
Specification Sections listed herein.
4. Provide all disconnects and power feeds as required for dimmer racks
5. Provide continuous liaison with the Construction Manager(CM) and other trades during
demolition, construction, and coordinate delivery schedules and installation of equipment.
6. The EC shall provide coordination drawings for approval showing all elements of the items
in this section in an AutoCAD® file Release 2012 or more recent due prior to the installation
of any materials on site. This drawing shall be executed using a cross-reference of the
appropriate areas of the building as a background supplied by the Architect. Minimum
drawings shall include plan and section of pertinent areas noting panels, conduit size,
elbows, bends and wiring devices. All elements of this drawing shall be on no more than
three layers all prefixed with “-ELEC”. All items shall be drawn full size with “color by layer”.
Hard (paper) and soft (digital) copies of this file shall be requested and used by the
Architect and Theatre Consultant.
7. Materials shall be as specified under Division 260000
8. This specification shall be considered as an outline form and other appurtenances that may
be required for the efficient and safe operation of the dimming and control systems
specified in this section shall be furnished by the EC, the same as if specified herein.
9. All work shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the latest editions of
applicable publications and standards of the following organizations:
National Electric Code (NEC) and all prevailing local regulations
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
National Electrical MFRS. Association (NEMA)
Federal Communication Commission (FCC)
United States Institute of Theater Technology (USITT)
10. The EC shall provide all mounting and mechanical installations and shall verify all mounting
conditions.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 113 of 145
11. Any materials installed which shall not present an orderly and reasonably neat or
workmanlike appearance shall be removed and replaced when so directed by the CM at
the EC's expense
12. Any quantities, measurements or dimensions listed or shown are for the convenience of
the EC in the preparation of his estimate, but will not relieve the EC of his responsibility for
the determination of the exact measurements required for a complete job.
C. SYSTEM OUTLINE
1. The theatrical dimming system consists of wiring devices, both low and line voltage,
theatrical dimmer rack, lighting control rack and remote consoles.
2. The DMX 512 control signal shall be generated by various consoles and devices, and shall
be connected to the dimmer racks via conduit runs and appropriate low voltage cables
specified herein. Access to the DMX network shall be provided via the Lighting Control
Rack (LCR).
3. All equipment shall be the coordinated system integrated by the SI in coordination with the
EC.
4. The specified dimming and control components are called out in terms of products as
manufactured by Electronic Theater Controls, Electronics Diversified, Union Connector
and others. This equipment is fully described in the Contract Documents. Complete
technical data is also available from the manufacturers. All catalog numbers are those
shown on Manufacturer's data sheets and drawings unless otherwise noted.
5. The dimming equipment, wiring devices and control devices shall be set into place and
installed by the EC. It shall be the EC's responsibility to run all conduit and wiring for line
and low voltage circuits, and make only line voltage terminations at the wiring devices.
6. When the EC is finished, a fully working and tested system will be turned over to the Owner.
If mention has been omitted of any items of the work or materials usually furnished for, or
necessary to the completion of the electrical work or if there are conflicting points in the
specifications and/or drawings, the Architect's attention should be called to such items in
sufficient time for a formal addendum to be issued.
D. SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
1. At no time shall the equipment furnished be energized prior to the SI authorized
commissioning
2. The EC shall notify the SI within at least two weeks time for system commissioning.
3. The EC shall confirm in writing that the following conditions have been met prior to
scheduling system commissioning.
Arrangements shall be made for access to all equipment. Scaffolding, lifts or any
other OSHA approved method shall be acceptable.
All dimmer racks shall be installed and wired.
All control wire shall be installed.
All distribution equipment shall be completely installed.
Continuity checks for the entire system shall have been performed and failures
remedied.
E. INSPECTION AND TESTING
1. Field Check-out & Final Approvals
Furnish all equipment and instruments necessary for testing the complete wiring
system during the progress of the work as well as after installation. Tests shall be
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner. Test the following:
1) All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits
2) All circuits are free from unspecified grounds
3) All circuits are properly connected in accordance with the applicable wiring
diagram
4) Voltage drop at each end of the circuit with a 2000 watt load
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 114 of 145
5) All low voltage circuits complying to industry standards
2. Final check of control systems.
All work under this contract, upon completion of installation, shall be demonstrated,
tested and adjusted in coordination with the SI and the EC. No part of the system
shall be energized before being so checked and the installation approved.
Make all necessary arrangements for all parties concerned to be present, by
scheduling such inspection in a manner acceptable to the Theatre Consultant and
give a minimum of 14 days notice.
Furnish all labor, materials and instruments necessary for this inspection and testing.
3. Final site visitation by the Theatre Consultant
When the work on the entire structure has been completed and is ready for final
review, a visit will be made by the Theatre Consultant or his duly authorized
representative, at which time the SI shall demonstrate that the requirements of the
contract as it applies to his work have been carried out and that the system has been
adjusted and operates in accordance therewith.
Any defects shall be repaired at once and the tests re-conducted.
4. DMX Emergency Bypass Controller:
Provide ETC model DEBC or equal
1) Functional requirements:
a) Overrides a single universe of ANSI E1.11–2008, USITT DMX512-A
control signals from “Normal” to “Bypass” when a trigger signal is
b) detected via a contact closure
c) Sends DMX signal to a single output or up to six optically-isolated outputs
d) Polls the bypass trigger input after a power loss to ensure proper state at
startup
e) Provides unprocessed DMX pass-through in normal operation mode
f) Supports a single configurable DMX preset (snapshot) of 512 channels for
recall when control is bypassed
g) Recalls default or recorded preset immediately whenever the bypass input
is triggered and power is present
2) Mechanical properties:
a) Enclosure constructed of 18-gauge, formed steel panels with a removable
front cover finished in fine-textured powder-coat paint
b) Designed for wall-mount applications
c) Internal voltage barrier provides separate wiring compartments for power
and control wiring
d) Bi-color LED status indicator visible from the exterior of the enclosure.
- Green: power is present and controller is functioning in normal state
- Red: controller is functioning in bypass state
e) Recessed test button to manually trigger bypass state is user-accessible
without removing covers
f) Internally-accessible DIP switches for configuration of:
- DMX record mode
- Contact input type
- Wait-time to restore incoming DMX (bypass trigger removed)
g) Internally accessible button for DMX record (snapshot) of bypass preset
with an indicator LED for record action
3) Electrical:
a) Supports 100 V to 277 V input power, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum current
b) Power input terminals accept two 24–10 AWG solid or stranded wires
c) Grounding lug accepts 14–2 AWG solid or stranded ground wire
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 115 of 145
d) Bypass contact input supports two 30–12 AWG low-voltage wires with two
modes:
- Configurable dry contact input supports maintained normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) triggering
- Wet contact input for interface with external systems, including fire
alarms
e) Supports one universe (512 channels) of DMX data compliant with ANSI
E1.11–2008, USITT DMX512-A
- DMX output and DMX input terminals for Belden 9729 cable or
equivalent
f) Non-volatile memory storage for a single recorded scene of 512 channels
g) DEBC-1 passes RDM data in normal mode
h) DEBC-6 passes RDM data through DMX Thru port in normal mode
5. DMX relay controller
Provide ETC Unison Foundry relay controller model # UFR2-LV or equal
1) FUNCTIONAL
a) Control for individual fxtures, zone power
b) Supports USITT DMX512-A (ANSI E1.11)
c) Supports RDM (ANSI E1.20)
2) MECHANICAL
a) Constructed of injection-molded ABS plastic
b) Button interface and LED indicators for confguration
c) Half-inch conduit knockout mounted
d) Mains-voltage wiring exits through knockout mount
e) 0-10V dimming control wiring exits through knockout mount
f) DMX wiring connects to side of controller
g) Mains power input connections:
-12 AWG Hot - Black
-14 AWG Neutral - White
h) Relay output connections:
- Zone 1, 12 AWG - Red
- Zone 2, 12 AWG - Red/White
i) Optional mounting plate available for applications that require low-voltage
wiring to be in conduit
3) ELECTRICAL
a) 120V-277V, 50/60Hz power input
b) Normally Open (NO) 20-amp fully-rated relay
c) Supports lighting and plug loads
d) UL and cUL LISTED
- Conforms to UL 508 and UL 2043
4) DMX INPUT PORT
a) Optically-isolated from Controller electronics
b) Withstands fault voltages of up to 250VAC
c) Integrated DMX/RDM termination
5) CONFIGURATION
a) Remote confguration available via RDM controllers including:
- ETC DMX/RDM gateway networked to a device running ETC Net3
Concert software
- ETC control console with RDM functionality
- 3rd party confguration and control products
b) Manual confguration of the starting DMX address on the controller
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 116 of 145
F. DMX/RDM Repeater module
1. For all DMX runs with 32 or more fixtures provide a DMX/RDM as required for interface of
house lighting with the theatrical lighting control system.
2. General
The eDIN DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall permit star-wiring and repeating of
DMX512 and RDM lighting control signals over the connected data cabling.
The Module shall fully isolate and protect DMX transmitters and receivers, and RDM
controllers and responders from high common mode voltages, ground loop currents
and other potentially damaging or disrupting electrical faults.
The Module shall have one input port, one pass-thru port and four output ports. All
ports shall be bi-directional.
There shall be no in-line processing of the input signal, to ensure that all output
signals are exact duplicates of the input signal with no processing delays.
The Module shall be capable of repeating and distributing simplex protocols other
than DMX512, provided they meet the electrical requirements of EIA-RS422 or
RS485.
The Module shall be designed to mount on standard 35mm DIN rail.
3. Features
LED indicators shall be provided for Power, Data-In and CPU status, as well as for
DMX/RDM activity on each of the four output ports.
The Module shall be capable of regenerating four (4) exact duplicate data streams
from the original source input data stream.
Each output shall be capable of driving up to 32 DMX-only receiving devices over a
maximum 500-meter (1600-ft.) length of cable.
Each output shall be capable of driving up to 31 DMX/RDM responding devices over
a maximum 300-meter (1000-ft.) length of cable.
One (1) DMX/RDM pass-thru port shall be provided. The pass-thru port shall be
active, i.e. electrically repeated.
For installations requiring DMX and RDM functionality, up to four repeater modules
may be cascaded together. For installations requiring only DMX functionality, up to
eight repeater modules may be cascaded together.
The Module itself shall act as an RDM responder.
It shall be possible to field-update the module firmware via the DMX input port.
4. Electrical
The power input shall be supplied by a Class 2 circuit. It shall accept a range of 9 to
30 volts DC and shall consume no more than 6 watts.
Multiple modules, up to the RDM-specified limitation of four (4), may be cascaded
(looped) on the same DMX/RDM input data line using the pass-thru ports or any
output ports.
In DMX-only installations, up to eight (8) modules may be cascaded (looped) on the
same DMX input data line using the pass-thru ports or any output ports.
All DMX/RDM input and output ports shall be capable of withstanding short-term
application of up to 250V without damage to internal components.
Port protection shall be self-healing, rated for 250V. Replaceable fuses shall not be
acceptable.
The DMX/RDM input port shall provide 1500-volt optical isolation between the input
signal wiring and output signal wiring.
DMX/RDM output ports shall be fully optically isolated from each other and floating
with respect to earth ground.
5. Physical
The DMX/RDM Repeater module shall be designed to snap on to 35mm DIN rail
without the use of tools.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 117 of 145
The Module shall measure 3.6 in.W x 6.25 in.L x 1.5 in.H (91mm x 160mm x 38mm).
The Module shall weigh 0.54 lb. (245g).
All DMX and power connections shall utilize pluggable Phoenix-type screw terminal
blocks, capable of accepting solid or stranded wire sizes from #26 to #16 AWG.
6. Environmental
The ambient operating temperature shall be -10 deg. to 50 deg.C (14 deg. to 122
deg.F).
The storage temperature shall be -40 deg. to 70 deg.C (-40 deg. to 158 deg.F).
The operating humidity shall be 5 percent - 95 percent non-condensing.
7. Compliance
The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall meet the requirements of USITT DMX512
(1990), ANSI E1.11 DMX512-A and ANSI E1.20 RDM.
The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall be compliant with the EU RoHS
(2002/95/EC) directive.
The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall conform to all FCC and CE requirements.
The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall be powered by a UL1310 Class 2 Low
Voltage circuit.
The module circuit board shall be manufactured from FR-4 glass epoxy laminate
with a UL 94 flammability rating of V0. The board shall be clearly marked as such.
The module carrier housing shall be manufactured from extruded rigid PVC with a
UL 94 flammability rating of 5VA.
8. Acceptable Product
The DMX/RDM Repeater Module(s) shall be Pathway eDIN model #1009.
ETC
Or equal
G. Emergency lighting transfer System
1. MANUFACTURER
ETC model ELTS2 series Cat# ELTS2-1-D/M(refer to drawings) 120-3P-2-24
Refer to electrical drawings for exact configurations.
2. GENERAL
full UL and cUL listing and approval for emergency transfer
ANSI/UL 1008 transfer Switch equipment
UL file # e157852
3. Complies with ANSI/NFPA 110, Standard for emergency and
Standby Power Systems
4. Satisfes requirements of the national electric Code (NFPA 70):
Article 700 – emergency Systems
Article 701 – legally required Standby Systems
Article 702 – optional Standby Systems
Section 518.3C – assembly occupancies
Section 520.7 – theatres and Similar locations
Section 540.11C – motion Picture Projection rooms
Self-contained system for up to 24 circuits
Short Circuit Current rating (SCCr): 5000A RMS symmetrical
Standard enclosure is NEMA 1
5. OPERATION
Monitors normal power and upon the detection of power failure, and presence of an
emergency source disconnects normal source and connects emergency source
When normal power is restored, the emergency source shall be disconnected from
the loads and normal source shall be connected to the loads.
monitors voltage on all normal phases
Field adjustable delay after a loss of normal power before switching to the
emergency source – adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 118 of 145
field adjustable delay after the restoration of normal power before switching to
normal source – adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds
emergency state control priority:
1) Power fail
2) fire alarm activation
3) local and/or remote activation
6. USER CONTROLS
front panel local control includes a test key switch and 3 indicators
test Key Switch – three-position momentary key switch.
1) normal mode with indicator
2) emergency mode with indicator
3) fire alarm with indicator
Allows connection of up to fve remote control stations (5-wire, 24V Class 2, tested
16 AWG up to 1000 ft.)
7. ELECTRICAL NORMAL SENSE FEED INPUT
AC circuits with neutral to provide power to the normal side of the electronics and
for sensing a power fail.
1) 120V – Single phase, 2 wire (d)
2) 277V - Single phase, 2 wire (d)
3) 120/208V three phase, 4 wire (m)
4) 120/240V Single phase, 3 wire (m)
5) 277/480V three phase, 4 wire (m)
Terminals sized for up to 8 aWG wire
Separate units required for mixed voltages
8. EMERGENCY SOURCE FEED
Type D: each circuit discretely fed from a remote breaker panel (supplied by others)
Available in the following confgurations:
1) 20a 120V circuits
2) 20a 277V circuits
Type M: Single feed main lugs provided to distribute emergency power to all circuits
Available in the following confgurations:
1) 120/208V – three phase, 4 wire, 80a for 12 circuits / 160a for 24 circuits
2) 120/240V – Single phase, 3 wire, 120a for 12 circuits / -240a for 24 circuits
For both types: input lug wire range of 14 aWG – 2/0 for 12 circuits (small enclosure)
or 6 aWG – 350kcmil for 24 circuits (large enclosure)
For both types: fuse protection to allow listed use with any circuit breaker brand
1) Class G SCCR protection
2) located on load side of contactor and protects both normal and emergency
source feeds
9. MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS LOAD CONTACTORS
20a circuits are rated for a continuous load of 1920 watts per circuit at 120V and
4432 watts per circuit at 277V.
A single contactor set controls no more than 2 circuits
Switch both hot and neutral wires
mechanically interlocked to insure a break before make
rated for mixed loads consisting of resistive, tungsten and discharge lamps
mechanically maintained (held)
10. FIRE ALARM INPUT
normally closed dry contact closure
Input terminals accepts 10 – 22 aWG class 2, two-wire from alarm panel
11. MECHANICAL
Wall mount unit with vertical mounting tab kit, alternative (horizontal) mounting tab
kit available
14 gauge welded steel cabinet, rated nema 1 or optional nema 4 cabinet
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 119 of 145
one-point (small unit) or three-point (large unit) door latch with key lock
ETC Sensor styling with fne-textured scratch resistant epoxy paint
Hinged front access to wiring space for easy contractor connections – clearly
marked termination strips and phase voltage lugs
Conduit entry via top, bottom or from any side (see manual)
Control wiring separated from the higher voltage wires to avoid contact during
installation.
H. CONDUIT SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS
1. The E.C. shall comply with the following conduit installation/separation requirements set
forth below for all theater related scope.
2. PSVC cabling is divided into four categories:
Low Level: 0-100 millivolts (microphone, audio tie lines)
Medium Level: 100 millivolts to 10 volts (video, intercom)
High Level: 10 volts to 70 volt (loudspeakers, control signals)
Digital: Fiber optic and Cat 5/6/7
3. Do not intermix wiring categories in a given raceway or conduit.
4. PSVC wiring, raceways, and conduit shall remain physically separate from any other
system which may cause interference.
5. Where AC power (120V or higher) must be parallel to sound, video, and communications
wiring, raceways and
6. conduit maintain a separation of at least 3 ft. -0 in. in runs under 75 ft. -0 in. or 6 ft. -0 in. in
runs over 75 ft.-0 in..
7. Sound, video, and communications wiring, raceways, and conduit must not run parallel to
power cabling in excess of 600 volts.
8. Sound, video, and communications wiring, raceways, and conduit must not run near power
transformers, dimmers, power control equipment, heavy current switchgear, breaker
panels, fluorescent ballasts, motors, or any other equipment which radiates interference.
9. In order to reduce magnetic interference in the theatre, do not route major power supplies
through the area of the stage fly tower, forestage area, or within 15 ft.-0 in. of the stage in
a studio theatre setting.
10. Schedule of minimum conduit separation by category
Minimum separation between conduits carrying wiring of different groups (90 degree
crossings in close proximity is acceptable where noted):
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 120 of 145
11. Install conduits per the table above. Where it is absolutely necessary to cross a conduit
with a conduit where separation is called for, the intersection must be at 90 degrees.
12. Install sound, video, and communications wiring within continuously grounded ferrous
metal conduit or raceway. EMT conduit needs to be used, as PVC conduit does not provide
any shielding.
13. Signal conduits shall be mechanically and electrically connected to receptacle boxes and
electrically isolated from sound system equipment racks.
RADIO REPEATER
A. Provide and install a 25 watt UHF (450-470MHz) Repeater, Duplexer and Antenna.
B. The repeater shall be able to operate in Mixed Mode operation to provide Analog 12.5 KHz
operation for existing portable radios and DMR Digital operation for Future Digital Portables.
C. (Kenwood TKR-D810K or equal)
D. The repeater shall be supplied in a wall mount enclosure including 110VAC power supply,
Duplexer, AC Surge suppression, Coax Lightning arrestor.
E. The repeater shall connect to a roof mount 5db Gain antenna (Amphenol Procom 5dB Part
100000117 or equal). Coax cable (1/2 in. Heliax LDF or equal) shall connect the antenna to the
repeater. The antenna and repeater shall be connected to building ground to protect from
lightning strikes.
F. The existing FCC License call sign WPGB311 shall be modified to include the new repeater
location. The contractor shall include the cost for license application, coordination and
preparation fee in the repeater price.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 121 of 145
EXECUTION
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Examine all surfaces and contiguous elements to receive work of this section and correct, as part
of the Work of this Contract, any defects affecting installation. Commencement of work will be
construed as complete acceptability of surfaces and contiguous elements.
WORK COORDINATION AND JOB OPERATIONS
A. Equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas without first
coordinating installation of same with other trades. Relocate electrical equipment installed in
congested or problem areas should it interfere with the proper installation of equipment to be
installed by other trades.
B. Particular attention shall be directed to coordination of lighting fixtures and other electrically
operated equipment requiring access which is to be installed in ceiling areas. Coordinate with
other trades, the elevations of equipment in hung ceiling areas to insure adequate space for
installation of recessed fixtures before said equipment is installed. Conflicts in mounting heights
and clearances above hung ceilings for installation of recessed lighting fixtures or other
electrically operated equipment requiring access shall be brought to the attention of Architect for
a decision prior to equipment installation.
C. Furnish to General Contractor and other subcontractors information relative to portions of
electrical installation that will affect other trades sufficiently in advance so that they may plan their
work and installation.
D. Obtain from other trades information relative to electrical work which he, the Electrical
Subcontractor, is to execute in conjunction with installation of other trades' equipment.
E. Lighting fixtures in mechanical spaces or utility/ storage rooms shall only be installed after all
mechanical equipment is in place.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Plans:
1. Drawings showing layout of electrical systems indicate approximate location of raceways,
outlets, and apparatus. Runs of feeders and branch circuits are schematic and are not
intended to show exact routing. Final determination as to routing shall be governed by
structural conditions and as indicated on the approved coordination drawings.
B. Specifications:
1. Specifications supplement drawings and provide specifics pertaining to methods and
material to be used.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 122 of 145
IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment shall be marked for ease of identification as follows:
1. Provide screw-on nameplates on switchboards, panelboards, F.A. terminal cabinets,
starters, and disconnect switches. Nameplates to be of black phenolic with white
engraving. For starters and disconnect switches lettering shall be minimum of ¼ in. high.
Nameplates on panelboards shall have the following information.
Line 1 - Panel designation in ½ in. high letters.
Line 2 - Utilization voltage in 3/8 in. high letters.
Line 3 - Distribution source "Fed from ¼ in. high letters.
2. Neatly typed directory cards listing circuit designations shall be fastened inside the cover
of panelboards. Spare circuits shall be penciled.
3. Provide Signage on all rooms that contain Fire alarm control equipment within it. Where a
Fire alarm control panel is located within a separate room provide permanent signage that
reads “ FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL INSIDE” with minimum 7 in. high by 10 in. width
with 2-inch high block letters a 0.5 in. letter stroke - white letters on a contrasting red
background. The sign shall be permanently attached, at normal eye level to the door
leading to the fire alarm control panel(s).
4. Color coding schedules. If there is more than a single system voltage, different voltages
shall have separate color codes, as previously specified. A copy of the color code schedule
shall be affixed to each secondary switchboard and distribution panel and shall be of the
phenolic nameplate type as previously specified. A typewritten color code schedule shall
also be affixed, under plastic, inside each panelboard door.
5. Outlet boxes both concealed and exposed shall be identified as to panel origination and
circuit number by means of fibre pen on the inside of coverplate.
6. Special system outlet boxes concealed above hung ceilings shall be identified as to system
by spray painting during roughing. The following systems shall be identified.
Fire Alarm - red.
Normal/Emergency - yellow.
Security - blue.
Sound - green.
7. Wiring device plates on devices connected to normal-emergency circuits shall be red in
color.
8. All conductors in boxes larger than standard outlet boxes, in all wireways, and trench
headers. shall be grouped logically and be identified.
9. Grounding conductors and neutrals shall be labeled in panels, and wireways. as to circuits
associated with.
10. Power and raceway identification:
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway size.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type (Power, Lighting, Emergency,
Control).
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high
letters.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide
black stripes on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full
length of raceway. Stop stripes at legends.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 123 of 145
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched
for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black
ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
11. Armored metal clad cable identification:
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches
wide; compounded for outdoor use.
12. Power and Control Cable identification:
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched
for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black
ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
13. Conductor Identification materials:
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3
mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit
identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black
ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
14. Underground warning tape:
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify
and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines but not less than
4 mils thick and 6 inches wide.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by direct-burial
service.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
Color and Printing:
1) Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2) Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3) Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV
CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 124 of 145
15. Warning labels and signs:
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive
adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to
equipment unless otherwise indicated.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and
size required for application. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
Weather-resistant signs, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs
with galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for
application. Nominal size 10 by14 inches.
Safety signs shall warn of potential electrical hazard and shall include, but are not
limited to, the following legends:
Multiple power source warning.
Workspace clearance warning.
Potential electric arc flash hazard.
16. Equipment identification labels:
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw
mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be
3/8 inch.
17. Cable ties:
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-
locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to
exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.
UL 94 Flame Rated.
18. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Coordinate names,
abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with
corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors
as approved in submittals and required by code.
19. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
20. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
21. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials
and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
22. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
23. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding
band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color
markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of
walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum
intervals in congested areas.
24. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of
conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
25. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
26. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 125 of 145
27. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
28. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.
Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
29. Renovation Projects: For alterations and additions to existing facilities, use existing
identification system. Where systems have not been standardized, use the identifying and
marking system specified in this standard.
30. Distribution Equipment: Identify major components of the distribution system (such as
circuit breakers, switches, transformers, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers)
with nameplates. Nameplates on disconnect switches and control stations shall identify
the equipment served.
31. Identification Schedule:
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for service, feeder,
and branch circuits more than 30A and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive
vinyl label applied at 10-foot maximum intervals.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: Identify conductors in the
panels, pull and junction boxes, manholes, handholes.
1) Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use
colors for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors as
specified in Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Power Conductors”.
a) Factory applied continuous color coding for conductors No.8 AWG and
smaller.
b) Field-applied, color coding conductor tape: For conductors No.6 AWG and
larger. Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches
from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
2) Lighting and Receptacle Outlet Boxes: Identify with the panel and circuit
number.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, above 600 V: For conductors in the vaults,
pull and junction boxes, manholes and handholes, use write-on tags.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals,
and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Terminal Blocks: Attach numbered nameplates to terminal blocks which require
identification numbers; use the designations shown on the wiring diagrams. Install
nameplate at the top of vertically mounted terminal blocks and at the end of
horizontally mounted terminal blocks. Indicate the individual terminal point
designation shown on the wiring diagrams.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system
used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the
direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar
equipment in the finished spaces.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs where required by the referenced
Electrical code, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install
self-adhesive warning labels or baked-enamel warning signs with approved legend
where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation.
Install metal-backed, butyrate warning signs for outdoor items.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 126 of 145
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend
on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions
at equipment used for power transfer, load shedding and other emergency
operations.
Safety sign for the switchboards and panelboards: Provide a sign to warn qualified
persons of potential electric arc flash hazard.
All electrical distribution equipment and mechanical/plumbing/fire protection
equipment fed from the electrical distribution system shall contain in addition to the
identification requirements listed in this section shall be labelled where they are fed
from. For example Distribution panel 4DP1A is fed from MSB-1A, its label shall be
“4DP1A fed from MSB-1A” submit full labeling scheme for review and approval.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique
designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to the disconnect switches and
protection equipment, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks
of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal,
monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own
identification.
1) Labeling Instructions:
a) Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b) Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic.
c) Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels
with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA
or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2) Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved
laminated acrylic. Panelboard directories shall identify the load name and
location (i.e. AHU-1, Room #, FCU-1, Room #).
PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
A. Protection:
1. Materials and equipment shall be suitably stored and protected from weather.
2. During progress of work, pipe and equipment openings shall be temporarily closed so as
to prevent obstruction and damage.
3. Be responsible for maintenance and protection of material and equipment until final
acceptance.
B. Cleanup:
1. Keep job site free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Remove all rubbish,
construction equipment, and surplus materials from site and leave premises in a clean
condition.
2. At completion, equipment with factory finished surfaces shall be cleaned and damaged
spots touched up with the same type paint applied at factory.
3. Particular attention is called to Section 110-12(c) of the NEC, which requires that internal
parts of electrical equipment not be contaminated by construction operations.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 127 of 145
PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Retain possession of and be responsible for spare parts, portable and detachable parts, and other
removable portions of installation including fuses, keys, locks, blocking clips, inserts, lamps,
instructions, drawings, and other devices or materials that are relative to and necessary for proper
operation and maintenance of the system until final acceptance, at which time such parts shall
be installed or turned over to the Owner, as the case may be.
B. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Provide proper guards, signage, and other necessary construction required for prevention
of accidents and to insure safety of life and property. Remove any temporary safety
precautions at completion.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailed
otherwise on drawings. Notes on architectural drawings shall supersede those noted below or
detailed on the electrical drawings. If mounting height of an electrical component is questionable,
obtain clarification from Architect before installation.
1. Duplex convenience outlets, microphone outlets, and telephone outlets - 18 inches.
2. Light switches, pushbutton stations, HOA switches, and all other toggle or control switches
for the operation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, plumbing, and general
service - 48 inches.
3. Clock outlets - 84 inches.
4. Fire alarm pull stations - 48 inches.
5. Fire alarm audio visual signals - 80 inches or 6 inches below ceiling, whichever is lower.
6. Panelboards for lighting, power, telephone, and other auxiliary systems – 78 in. to top.
7. Equipment located in lobbies shall be located as detailed on architectural drawings.
8. All receptacles, light switches, fire alarm signals, and clocks sharing a common location
shall be symmetrically arranged.
9. Exterior and interior wall brackets shall be as detailed on architectural drawings.
B. Mounting heights given are from finished floor to centerline. In the case of a raised floor, surface
of raised floor is the finished floor.
WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Work shall be installed in first-class manner consistent with best current trade practices.
Equipment shall be securely installed plumb and/or level. Flush-mounted outlet boxes shall have
front edge flush with finished wall surface. No electrical equipment shall be supported by work of
other trades. Cable systems shall be supported and not draped over ducts and piping or laid on
ceiling suspension members. Lighting fixtures shall be installed to agree with Architects reflected
ceiling plans.
B. Supports:
1. Support work in accordance with best industry practice and by use of standard fittings.
2. In general, walls and partitions will not be suitable for supporting weight of panelboards,
dry type transformers and the like. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor
slab to structure above.
3. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface mounting
in free standing position where no walls exist.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 128 of 145
4. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty
support system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to
form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike
arrangement of equipment.
5. Provide ¾ in. thick painted plywood mounting surfaces in all electric and telephone areas
and for all equipment on free standing racks. All plywood shall be fire retardant and painted
both sides and edges with 2 coats of white paint.
6. No work for exposed installations in damp locations shall be mounted directly on any
building surface. In such locations, flat bar members or spacers shall be used to create a
minimum of ¼ in. air space between building surfaces and work.
7. Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric
raceways or cables for support. All outlet, pull, and junction boxes shall be independently
supported.
8. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling or its mounting
members.
9. Support surface or pendant mounted lighting fixtures:
From outlet box by means of an interposed metal strap, where weight is less than
five pounds.
From outlet box by means of a hickey or other direct threaded connection, where
weight is from five to fifty pounds.
Directly from structural slab, deck or framing member, where weight exceeds fifty
pounds.
Pendant lighting fixtures shall be supported by threaded rods in non-public areas
and by manufacturers standard tube hangers with swivel aligner and canopy in
public areas. Provide non-standard pendant lengths where required to mount
fixtures at elevations either called for on drawings or as shown in architectural
elevations.
10. Support recessed lighting fixtures directly from structural slabs, decks or framing members,
by means of jack chain or air craft cable, one at each end of fixture at opposite corners.
11. Where support members must of necessity penetrate air ducts, provide airtight sealing
provisions which allow for a relative movement between the support members and the duct
walls.
12. Provide channel sills or skids for leveling and support of all floor mounted electrical
equipment.
13. Where permitted loading is exceeded by direct application of electrical equipment to a slab
or deck, provide proper dunnage to distribute the weight in a safe manner.
14. Support metallic raceways by either running within steel frame or hung from the building
frame. Anything hung from building frame shall be attached with metallic fasteners.
C. Fastenings:
1. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice.
2. Where weight applied to attachment points is 100 pounds or less, fasten to building
elements of:
Wood -- with wood screws.
Concrete and solid masonry -- with bolts and expansion shields.
Hollow construction -- with toggle bolts.
Solid metal -- with machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.
3. Where weight applied to attachment points exceeds 100 pounds, fasten as follows:
At field poured concrete slabs, provide inserts with 18 in.minimum length
slip-through steel rods, set transverse to reinforcing steel.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 129 of 145
Where building is steel framed, utilize suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron
bridging between structural steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging
members shall be suitably welded or clamped to building steel. Provide threaded
rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.
4. Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Provide
floor anchor fastenings. Floor mounted equipment over 72 inches in height shall also be
braced to nearest wall or overhead structural elements.
5. For items which are shown as being mounted at locations where fastenings to the building
construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron
bridging to building structural elements.
6. Fastenings for metallic raceways using the fastening as support shall be of the metallic
type. Fastenings to hold raceways or cables in place may be via traps.
D. General Raceway Installation:
1. Install the various types of raceways in permitted locations as previously specified. All
raceways shall be run concealed. Consult Architect for instruction for raceways which must
be exposed in public spaces.
2. Raceways for normal emergency or emergency only wiring cannot contain other
conductors.
3. Raceways shall be properly aligned, grouped, and supported in accordance with code.
Exposed raceways shall be installed at right angles to or parallel with structural members.
Concealed raceways may take most direct route between outlets.
4. Raceways run on trapeze hangers shall be secured to the trapeze.
5. Raceways shall be continuous and shall enter and be secured to all boxes in such a
manner that each system shall be electrically continuous from service to all outlets.
Provide grounding bushings and bonding jumpers where raceways attach to painted
enclosures or terminate below equipment.
6. Where raceways enter boxes, cabinets, tap boxes, other than those having threaded hubs,
a standard locknut shall be used on the outside and locknut and bushing on the inside.
7. Where raceways terminate below equipment and there is no direct metal to metal
continuity, provide grounding bushings on raceways and interconnect with equipment
grounding conductor.
8. All empty raceways shall be provided with a pull wire.
9. All raceway sleeves, stub-ups, or stub-outs, where not connected to a box or cabinet, shall
be terminated with a bushing.
10. All raceway joints shall be made up tight and no running threads will be permitted.
11. Where raceways are cut, the inside edge shall be reamed smooth to prevent injury to
conductors.
12. All vertical raceways passing through floor slabs shall be supported.
13. Raceways shall not be installed in concrete slabs above grade or below waterproofed
slabs.
14. Electric raceways and/or sleeves passing through floors or walls shall be of such size and
in such location as not to impair strength of construction. Where raceways alter structural
strength or the installation is questionable, the structural engineer shall be contacted for
approval.
15. Raceways shall not run directly above or below heat producing apparatus such as boilers,
nor shall raceways run parallel within 6 inches of heated pipes. Raceways crossing heated
pipes shall maintain at least a 1 inch space from them.
16. Raceways shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent collection of trapped
condensates, and all runs shall be arranged to drain.
17. Raceways passing between refrigerated and non-refrigerated spaces and those
penetrating enclosures with air movement shall be provided with seals.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 130 of 145
18. Raceways feeding fire and jockey pumps shall be rigid metal conduit either run below slab
or inside 2 hour rated enclosure. Final connections to motors shall be liquidtite flexible
conduit.
19. Where two alternate wiring methods interconnect such as EMT to flexible metal conduit,
an outlet box shall be provided.
20. All empty raceways entering building and all sleeves or core drilled openings through floors
shall be sealed.
21. Each exterior raceway or assembly in a ductbank shall be provided with continuous
warning tape installed 12 inches above raceway or ductbank.
22. Underground rigid non-metallic raceways where allowed and run as a ductbank encased
in concrete shall be installed with plastic spacers to ensure a separation of 3 inches
between raceways. Top of ductbanks shall be 30 inches below grade, unless otherwise
detailed.
23. Elbows and extensions of rigid non-metallic raceway systems which penetrate slabs shall
be rigid or intermediate metal conduit.
24. Raceways used for transformer connections shall be flexible type and shall contain a
grounding conductor.
25. Raceways entering building through foundation wall into a basement area shall be provided
with wall entrance seals or with other acceptable waterproofing method.
26. Underground non-metallic raceways shall be fully surrounded by a selected backfill to
prevent more than the desired deflection and, in power raceways is needed to provide
room for heat dissipation and good compaction of backfill. Separation Between Direct-
Buried, Non-encased Ducts: 3 inches minimum for like services, and 12 inches minimum
between power and signal ducts, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Raceways
formation for non-encased ducts shall be built up layer by layer. After each layer is placed,
the selected backfill shall be placed over it to the specified depth. This fill should be spread
evenly and compacted to provide continuous support for the next tier of raceways. Any
temporary spacers used should be removed from each layer of raceway as soon as backfill
is completed in that layer. A maximum of 9 conduits shall be grouped in the same trench
unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
27. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
28. Run conduit concealed in finished areas above suspended ceilings, in wall spaces.
Exposed conduit runs in finished areas require Architect's approval. Properly group
conduit runs. Install conduit parallel to walls, structure and ceilings, and support with
proper hangers and clamps. Running conduits at the bottom of structural members in
exposed conditions is not allowed. Check door swings before installing back boxes for
switches and receptacles.
29. Where conduit passes through a building expansion joint, use weatherproof, telescopic
type expansion fittings which permit at least 4 inches of movement.
30. Form bends in conduit by means of a conduit bending machine or by an approved hickey.
To fasten conduit to outlet boxes, cabinets, use locknuts and insulated throat bushings of
compatible material. 31. Cut conduit ends square, thread conduit, and ream to remove burrs and sharp edges. Field
threads shall be of the same type and have the same effective length as factory cut threads.
Turns, wherever required in exposed conduit runs, shall be made by the use of factory-
made bends, or field-made bends that meet the requirements of this Section and Electric
Code. In the event of a multiplicity of conduits making the same turn, a steel junction box
with a removable steel cover may be used. Offsets and bends for changes in elevation of exposed conduit runs shall be made at walls or beams and not in open spaces between
walls or beams. Rout conduits required to avoid interfere with the operation or
maintenance of equipment.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 131 of 145
32. Plug or cap conduit ends as soon as conduit is installed, to prevent entrance of moisture
or other debris during construction. Do not pull wire into any conduit until the conduit
system is complete.
33. Drawings, in relation to the routing of conduits, are diagrammatic. Except where additional
conduits may be required to avoid derating of branch circuits, elsewhere within this Section,
the number and size of conduits and wire shall be furnished and installed as indicated by
the drawings. Coordinate routing of conduits in the field with the building structure. Run
conduit in straight lines parallel and perpendicular to walls, beams, and columns and with
right angle bends and threaded conduit fittings. Maintain 12 inches clearance between
conduit and surface with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
34. Conduits passing through floors, walls and beams shall be of such size, number, and in
such locations so as not to impair the strength of the construction.
35. Rout raceways in ceiling spaces in an orderly and organized manner, and to eliminate or
minimize the number of junction boxes required. Support and secure conduits by means
of rods, clamps and other conduit support devices approved by the Architect. Do not use
wire to support conduits.
36. Where rigid metal conduit is threaded in the field, use a standard conduit cutting die
providing 3/4 inch taper per foot.
37. Conduit and EMT runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from service
entrance to outlets. Secure conduit to cabinet, junction box, pull box or outlet box with
locknut outside and bushing inside, or with liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld
wedge adapter. Locknuts and bushings or self-locking adapters will not be required where
conduits are screwed into tapped connections. Before installing conductions, protect
vertical conduit runs that terminate in bottoms of wall boxes or cabinets from entrance of
foreign material.
38. Size rigid steel conduit, EMT and flexible metallic conduit required by the referenced
Electrical Code, except as otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. Check raceway
sizes to determine that equipment grounding conductor fits in same raceway with phase
and neutral conductors to meet Massachusetts Electrical Code percentage of fill
requirements.
39. Where conduit is secured rigidly on opposite sides of building expansion joints, and where
runs of exposed conduit are long and subject to stress, provide expansion fittings capable
of safely deflecting and expanding to twice the distance of structural movement. Provide
separate external copper bonding jumper secured with grounding straps on each end of
fitting.
40. Install a pull or junction box every 100 feet of straight conduit run, and wherever there is
an equivalent of four 90 degree elbows or a total of 360 degree bend. Install no more than
the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications
conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
41. Install sealing fittings at following points, and elsewhere as shown:
Where conduits enter or leave hazardous areas equipped with explosion proof
lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles, and other electrical devices.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations.
42. Pull cords: In each empty raceway, provide nylon fishing line having tensile strength not
less than 200 lbs, or provide No. 14 AWG steel wire. Label each end of each line or wire
with a securely attached tag which indicates the location of the other end.
43. Liquid-tight type flexible conduits installed in the air-handling plenum space shall be with a
plenum- rated outer jacket.
44. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow
compound manufacturer's written instructions.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 132 of 145
E. General Outlet Box Installation:
1. Boxes shall be set flush with finish surface and provided with proper type extension rings
or plaster covers. Thru the wall boxes are not permitted. Check device or fixture to be
mounted to box to ensure box orientation is proper.
2. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to
cables and wires during pulling-in operation.
3. Plug unused openings on all remove knockouts.
4. Where required for horizontal and vertical alignment of boxes in stud partitions, bar hangers
spanning two studs shall be used. Device boxes for insertion type receptacles shall be
provided with far side box supports where there are less than two entering nonflexible
raceways, and where bar rangers are not provided.
5. Boxes flush mounted in fire rated partitions and on opposite sides of the partition shall be
separated by a distance of 24 inches in accordance with UL listing for the box.
6. Locations of outlets indicated on drawings are approximate. For items exposed to view,
refer to architectural drawings and coordinate locations with masonry joints, panel joints,
ceiling grids, and structural members.
7. In case of conflict with standard mounting heights and device alignment, consult Architect
prior to roughing.
8. Check all door swings on architectural drawings to ensure lighting switches are installed
on strike side of door.
9. The right to make any reasonable change in location of outlets prior to roughing is reserved
by Architect. "Reasonable change" shall be interpreted as movement within 10 feet of
location shown.
10. Obtain dimensioned plan from Architect for floor outlets.
11. Outlet boxes for use where surface metal raceways are allowed shall be of a type
specifically designed to be used with such surface metal raceway systems.
F. Conductor Installation:
1. No conductors shall be pulled into individual raceways until such raceway system is
complete and free of debris. No harmful lubricants shall be used to ease pulling.
2. All conductors shall be wired so that grounded conductor is unbroken; switches in all cases
being connected in ungrounded conductor.
3. Connections throughout the entire job shall be made with solderless type devices of
approved design satisfactory to Inspector of Wires.
4. All taps and splices shall be insulated equal to that of conductor insulation.
5. All conductors of each feeder in pull boxes and wireways. shall be grouped, tied together,
supported, and identified.
6. All conductors in panelboards and other wiring enclosures shall be neatly formed and
grouped.
7. All conductors of emergency only and/or normal/emergency shall be run in separate
raceway systems to final outlet box.
8. Provide support for conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with Article 300-19.
9. Strip insulation from conductors with approved tools and only of sufficient length for proper
termination. Cutting of conductor stranding is unacceptable.
10. Taps from paralleled conductors shall be of a type which tap each conductor, such as
ILSCO "PTA" series.
11. Grounding conductors are to be identified as to associated power circuits.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 133 of 145
G. Type MC Cable Installation:
1. Where cable is permitted under the products section, the installation of same shall be done
in accordance with code and the following:
Cable shall be supported in accordance with code. Tie wire is not an acceptable
means of support. Horizontally run cable supports such as Caddy WMX-6, and
clamps on vertical runs such as Caddy CJ6 shall be used. Where cables are
supported by the structure and only need securing in place, then ty-raps will also be
acceptable. Ty-raps are not acceptable as a means of support. All fittings, hangers,
and clamps for support and termination of cables shall be of types specifically
designed for use with cable, i.e., romex connectors not acceptable.
Armor of cable shall be removed with rotary cutter device equal to roto-split by
Seatek Co., not with hacksaw.
Use split "insuliner" sleeves at terminations.
Any cable system used in conjunction with isolated ground circuits shall have both
an isolated ground conductor and an equipment ground conductor.
H. Stranded Conductor Installation:
1. If Electrical SubContractor selects stranded conductors for # 10 AWG and smaller,
terminate such conductors as follows:
No stranded conductor may be terminated under a screwhead. Provide insulated
terminal lugs for all screw connections equal to Thomas & Betts "STA-KON" type
RC with forked tongue and turned up toes. Installation of lugs shall be done with
compression tool such as T&B WT-145C which prevents opening of tool until full
compression action is completed.
Backwired wiring devices shall be of clamp type; screw tightened. Force fit
connections not allowed.
2. Stranded conductors will not be allowed for fire alarm work.
I. Accessibility:
1. Electrical equipment requiring service or manual operation shall be accessible.
2. Work switches for equipment within accessible hung ceiling spaces, such as fan powered
terminal boxes, shall be located at terminal box, and so located so as to be accessible.
J. Vibration Elimination: All equipment connections to rotating equipment or equipment capable of
vibration shall be made up by flexible raceways.
K. Wiring Device Gaskets: Provide wiring device gaskets at coverplates where device is mounted
in wall separating conditioned and non-conditioned spaces.
FEEDER CIRCUITS
A. Provide feeders as called for on the drawings.
B. Feeders shall be defined as any circuit originating from the main building switchboard and/or
distribution panels.
C. All feeder conductors shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment termination without
splicing.
D. All feeders shall be conductors pulled into raceways. Cable systems are not allowed for feeders
unless specifically indicated.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 134 of 145
BRANCH CIRCUITS
A. Provide all branch circuit wiring and outlets for a complete and operating system. The system
shall consist of insulated conductors connected to the panelboards and run in raceways or as
cable systems if permitted under products section, to the final outlet and shall include outlet
boxes, supports, fittings, receptacles, plates, fuses, for a fully functional system.
B. Provide dedicated neutrals for all lighting circuits and all circuits originating from panelboards fed
from K-rated transformers.
C. Physical arrangement of branch circuit wiring shall correspond to circuit numbering on drawings.
Combining of circuits and raceways will be allowed up to a 3 phase, 4 wire circuit or 3 phase 6
wire (dedicated neutrals) in a single raceway. Any combination of homeruns such as this,
however, shall be indicated on record drawings. When a common grounded conductor is used
for more than one circuit, the arrangement shall be such that a receptacle, fixture, or other device
may be removed or disconnected without disconnecting the grounded conductor for other circuits.
Ground fault circuit breakers and isolated ground outlets shall be wired with separate neutrals
and separate grounding conductors per circuit. A consistent phase orientation shall be adhered
to throughout project at terminations.
D. Circuits feeding three phase equipment shall not be combined into common raceways, unless
specifically indicated.
E. All wiring in panelboards and cabinets shall be neatly formed and grouped.
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS:
A. General: Install firestop systems at all new and existing fire-rated construction where penetrated
by the Work of this Section.
B. Refer to Section 078400 - Firestopping, for all installation requirements for maintaining integrity
of fire-rated construction at penetrations.
WATERPROOFING
A. Waterproof all openings in slabs and walls.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Core drilling, up to and including 8 in. in diameter, and cutting equivalent to or less than the cross-
sectional equivalent of 8 in. square shall be performed by the Electrical Sub-contractor. Sleeves
and box-outs shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor regardless of size. Cutting of surfaces,
including core drilling of walls and slabs, shall be done by Electrical Subcontractor. Openings
through new wall surfaces will be provided by General Contractor if Electrical Subcontractor gives
suitable notice as erection of surface proceeds. If suitable notice is not given, Electrical
Subcontractor shall then be responsible for cost of corrective work required.
B. Patching will be provided by the trade responsible for the surface to be patched.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 135 of 145
ELEVATOR COORDINATION
A. Elevator Electrical Work:
1. Several items pertaining to elevator electrical system shall be provided by Electrical
Subcontractor as follows:
Power source to elevator machine room including fused disconnect switch and
wiring between disconnect switch and controller for each elevator.
Power source to elevator machine room including fused disconnect switch (120 volt)
for elevator signal system and cab light for each cab.
Light, switch, and GFCI receptacle in each pit.
Light, switch, and GFCI receptacle in machine room.
Junction box in machine room with five control modules from fire alarm system for
elevator recall to prevent cab opening on a fire floor.
Junction box in machine room for cab telephone with one 1 in. conduit with (2) CAT
6 telephone cables to main telephone demarcation backboard.
Power to automatic damper in hoistway penthouse louver.
Power wiring to elevator sump pump.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM COORDINATION
A. The Mechanical System Subcontractor will be providing various items of mechanical services
equipment and control apparatus. Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish disconnect switches and
starters and connect up power wiring to this equipment.
B. The Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractor shall closely coordinate their respective portions of
work.
C. If, due to local regulations, electric heating equipment furnished by the mechanical systems
subcontractor is required to be installed by licensed electricians in order to allow connection by
Electrical Subcontractor's licensed electricians, it will then be Mechanical Subcontractor's
responsibility to engage and pay for services of such licensed electricians.
D. Power wiring to be provided by Electrical Subcontractor is the line voltage power supply wiring.
Control wiring is responsibility of Mechanical System Subcontractor unless specifically indicated
on electrical drawings, or in this Division of the specifications. Temperature Control Subcontractor
shall refer to electrical drawings for location of all magnetic starters.
E. 120 volt control wiring source to the temperature control panel is the responsibility of Electrical
Subcontractor.
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT TESTING
A. All dry-type transformers, individual motor starters, switchboard and main distribution panels,
motor controls, motor control centers, feeder conductors, and emergency systems shall be tested
in accordance with the following. In general, all tests shall be done in accordance with the 2013
Acceptance Testing Specifications of the International Electrical Testing Association.
B. The Testing Subcontractor may be an independent contractor, a manufacturer of the equipment
which is to be tested, or electrical subcontractor with NICET Level IV power certification.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 136 of 145
C. Test report forms, delineating tests to be made, and method of recording same shall be submitted
prior to commencing work. Test reports when submitted shall include interpretation of results and
recommendation for any corrective work required.
D. Switchboards and Main Distribution Panels:
1. Visual Inspection:
Check for foreign material within bus enclosure.
Check for missing hardware.
Inspect entire assemblies for transit damage or factory defects.
Check for all bus dimensions and bracing per specifications.
Check ratings of current transformers and potential transformers.
Check ratings of all protective relays per drawings.
2. Physical Inspection:
Torque all bus hardware to proper tension.
Circuit breaker interlocks all work properly.
All doors and hinged panels open and close properly.
Relay blocking removed from all control and protective relays.
All circuit breakers operate, close and trip mechanically.
Torque all feeder conductors to terminal manufacturers' recommendations.
3. Electrical Testing:
Breakers operated electrically trip and close from local and remote positions.
All circuit breakers calibrated to manufacturer's respective time current curves as
specified.
1) Long time pick-up amps.
2) Long time delay tripping at 300 percent of current setting.
3) Resets okay at 80 percent of pick-up value.
4) Short time pick-up current.
5) Short time delay trip time at 105 percent of setting.
6) Instantaneous minimum pick-up current.
All protective relays calibrated to manufacturer's characteristic time curves for
pick-up, drop-out, instantaneous and time delay.
All instruments calibrated for accuracy.
Protective relay schemes to be electrically tested by primary injection of current
through current transformers and the tripping of associated circuit breakers.
Insulation resistance tests made on all circuit breakers, line to load breaker open,
line to ground breaker closed, 3 poses tested individually. Switchgear bus to be
tested phase to phase and phase to ground with Megohometer type instrument.
Relays also to be insulation resistance tested.
E. Transformers:
1. Visual inspection for transit damage such as broken porcelain, brazed connections broken
off, core shifted on frame, winding damage, and loose parts.
2. Insulation resistance tests in accordance with U.S.A.S.I. Standard C571222 and NEMA
TRI-2.055.
3. D.C. over-potential test procedures and A.C. voltage values for factory proof testing of
C57.12968 and NEMA TRI-2.055. The ratio applied for converting A.C. test potential to
equivalent D.C. value is 1.6.
4. Acceptance test voltage for new transformers at D.C. value will be 75 percent of equivalent
A.C. voltage used for factor proof testing the value will be 65 percent.
5. Transformers shall be subjected to a ratio and polarity test to prove the polarity and winding
ratio as in accordance with nameplate specifications.
6. Torque all connections to terminal manufacturers' recommendations.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 137 of 145
F. Starters:
1. Visual inspection to determine:
Shipping damage.
Proper bussing and contactor sizes.
Correct overload relay heater ratings. Any incorrectly sized overloads shall be
replaced by the contractor who originally provided same.
2. Electrical Testing:
Electrical operation of control relays, timing relay, and contactor coils.
Insulation resistance test on all current carrying bus to ground and between phases.
Calibration check of overload heater to ascertain tripping point and time delay at 300
percent of heater rating.
G. Conductors: All secondary service conductors and all feeder conductors from switchboards and
distribution panels shall be tested.
1. Visual and mechanical inspection: Conductors to be inspected for physical damage and
proper connection and sizing in accordance with single line diagram.
2. Conductor connections shall be torque tested to manufacturer's recommended values.
3. Electrical Tests: Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to
ground and adjacent conductor.
4. Perform continuity test to insure proper conductor connection.
H. Emergency Systems:
1. Engine Generator - Prior to the emergency generator test specified under the emergency
generator specification, the testing contractor shall perform the following:
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Inspect for physical damage.
2) Compare nameplate rating and connection with specifications and single line
diagram.
3) Inspect for proper anchorage and grounding. Verify engine cooling and fuel
system integrity.
Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
1) Perform a dielectric absorption test on generator winding with respect to
ground. Determine polarization index.
2) Perform phase rotation test to determine compatibility with load requirements.
3) Test protective relay devices in accordance with applicable sections of these
specifications.
4) Perform dc over potential test between winding and ground.
2. Automatic Transfer Switches:
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Inspect for physical damage.
2) Verify that the short circuit withstand rating exceeds the available short circuit
duty.
3) Compare equipment nameplate information and connections with single line
diagram and report any discrepancies.
4) Check switch to ensure positive interlock between normal and alternate
sources. (Mechanical and Electrical).
5) Check tightness of all control and power connections.
6) Perform manual transfer operation.
7) Ensure manual transfer warnings are attached and visible to operator.
Electrical Tests:
1) Perform insulation resistance tests phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with
switch in both source positions.
2) Measure contact resistance in normal and alternate source position.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 138 of 145
3) Set and calibrate in accordance with the project electrical engineer's
specifications.
a) Voltage and frequency sensing relays.
b) All time delay relays.
c) Engine start and shutdown relay.
4) Perform automatic transfer by tests.
a) Simulating loss of normal power.
b) Return to normal power.
c) Simulating loss of emergency power on return to normal.
d) Simulate all forms of single phase conditions.
5) Monitor and verify correct operation and timing.
a) Normal voltage sensing relays.
b) Engine start sequence.
c) Time delay upon transfer.
d) Alternate voltage sensing relays.
e) Automatic transfer operation.
f) Interlocks and limit switch function.
g) Timing delay and retransfer upon normal power restoration.
h) Engine cool down and shutdown feature.
I. Grounding Grids or Electrodes: Measurement of resistance from ground grids or electrodes to
earth to determine adequacy of grounding system in building and compliance with specifications
and/or electrical code.
J. Settings of Adjustable Devices: Using the result of the fault current and coordination study
specified hereinafter, the Testing Contractor shall set all adjustable devices.
K. In addition to the testing requirements of this Section refer to Section 019113 – Building
Commissioning Requirements for additional requirements.
ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS / SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY
A. Trade Contract:
1. Work of this Section is part of the Electrical trade contract. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for
additional information about this work.
B. Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
C. Scope:
1. The Electrical SubContractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination
studies as prepared by the manufacturer of the switchgear provided for the project.
2. The Electrical SubContractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per the
requirements set forth in the current version of NFPA 70E -Standard for Electrical Safety
in the Workplace. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE
Standard 1584 – 2002, the IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations.
3. The scope of the studies shall include new distribution equipment supplied by switchgear
manufacturer furnishing the electrical distribution equipment for this project.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 139 of 145
D. References:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination
of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems
IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System
Analysis
IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial
Buildings
IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
IEEE 1584 -Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers
ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures
ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution
Enclosed Single- Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories.
3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code, latest edition
NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
E. Submittals For Review/Approval:
1. The studies shall be submitted to the design engineer prior to receiving final approval of the
distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment drawings for
manufacturing. If formal completion of the study may cause delays in equipment shipments,
approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of data to ensure
that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory to properly select
the distribution equipment. The formal study will be provided to verify preliminary findings.
F. Submittals For Construction:
1. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis
studies shall be summarized in a final report. A minimum of five (5) bound copies of the
complete final report shall be submitted. For large system studies,
2. requiring more than five (5) copies of the report will be provided without the section
containing the computer printout of the short- circuit input and output data. Electronic PDF
copies of the report shall be provided upon request.
3. The report shall include the following sections:
Executive Summary including Introduction, Scope of Work and
Results/Recommendations.
Short-Circuit Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations
Short-Circuit Device Evaluation Table
Protective Device Coordination Methodology Analysis Results and
Recommendations
Protective Device Settings Table
Time-Current Coordination Graphs and Recommendations
Arc Flash Hazard Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations including
the details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations, along
with Arc Flash boundary distances, working distances, Incident Energy levels and
Personal Protection Equipment levels.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 140 of 145
Arc Flash Labeling section showing types of labels to be provided. Section will
contain descriptive information as well as typical label images.
One-line system diagram that shall be computer generated and will clearly identify
individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable
and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit
current at each bus location, device numbers used in the time-current coordination
analysis, and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.
G. Qualifications:
1. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall
be conducted under the responsible charge and approval of a Registered Professional
Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies.
2. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be an employee of the equipment
manufacturer.
3. The approved engineering firm shall demonstrate experience with Arc Flash Hazard
Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual arc flash hazard analyses it has
performed in the past year.
H. Computer Analysis Software:
1. The studies shall be performed using SKM Systems Analysis Power*Tools for Windows
(PTW) software program.
I. Studies:
1. The Electrical SubContractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA
70E -Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.
This study shall also include short-circuit and protective device coordination studies.
J. Data:
1. Electrical SubContractor shall furnish all data as required for the power system studies. The
Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard
analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after
award of the contract. The Electrical SubContractor shall expedite collection of the data to
assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment
shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing.
2. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators.
3. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract
Documents provided by Owner, or General Contractor.
4. If applicable, include fault contribution of existing motors in the study. The Electrical
SubContractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the
study requirements.
K. Short-Circuit Analysis:
1. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.
2. Provide the following:
Calculation methods and assumptions
Selected base per unit quantities
One-line diagram of the system being evaluated that clearly identifies individual
equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus
connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at
each bus location and other information pertinent to the computer analysis
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 141 of 145
The study shall include input circuit data including electric utility system
characteristics, source impedance data, conductor lengths, number of conductors
per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer impedances
and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit information as related to the
short-circuit calculations.
Tabulations of calculated quantities including short-circuit currents, X/R ratios,
equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current ratings and notes regarding
adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment rating.
Results, conclusions, and recommendations. A comprehensive discussion section
evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment must be provided and
include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system.
3. For solidly-grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for
applicable buses as determined by the engineer performing the study.
4. Protective Device Evaluation:
Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings
Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to
withstand short- circuit stresses
Switchgear Manufacturer shall notify Owner in writing, of any circuit protective
devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current.
L. Protective Device Time-Current Coordination Analysis:
1. Protective device coordination time-current curves (TCC) shall be displayed on log-log
scale graphs.
2. Include on each TCC graph, a complete title with descriptive device names.
3. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or
asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.
4. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if
applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
5. Plot the following characteristics on the TCC graphs, where applicable:
Electric utility’s overcurrent protective device
Medium voltage equipment overcurrent relays
Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total
clearing, tolerance, and damage bands
Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s
tolerance bands
Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault
protection curves
Medium voltage conductor damage curves
Ground fault protective devices, as applicable
Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points, where applicable
Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point
The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center and applicable
panelboard.
6. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective
operation is provided, while providing proper protection.
Provide the following:
1) A One-line diagram shall be provided which clearly identifies individual
equipment buses, bus numbers, device identification numbers and the
maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 142 of 145
2) A sufficient number of log-log plots shall be provided to indicate the degree of
system protection and coordination by displaying the time-current
characteristics of series connected overcurrent devices and other pertinent
system parameters.
3) Computer printouts shall accompany the log-log plots and will contain
descriptions for each of the devices shown, settings of the adjustable devices,
and device identification numbers to aid in locating the devices on the log-log
plots and the system one-line diagram.
4) The study shall include a separate, tabular printout containing the
recommended settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the
equipment designation where the device is located, and the device number
corresponding to the device on the system one-line diagram
5) A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and
service continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as
required for addressing system protection or device coordination deficiencies.
6) Switchgear Manufacturer shall notify Owner in writing of any significant
deficiencies in protection and/or coordination. Provide recommendations for
improvements.
M. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis:
1. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that
are presented in NFPA70E-2009, Annex D. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be
performed in conjunction with the short-circuit analysis (Section 2.03) and the protective
device time-current coordination analysis (Section 2.04).
2. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at significant
locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control
centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized
parts.
3. Circuits 240V or less fed by single transformer rated less than 125 kVA may be omitted
from the computer model and will be assumed to have a hazard risk category 0 per NFPA
70E.
4. Working distances shall be based on IEEE 1584. The calculated arc flash protection
boundary shall be determined using those working distances.
5. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase
overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model.
Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the
clearing time when performing incident energy calculations
6. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for
multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be
uniquely reported for each equipment location in a single table. Calculations must be
performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude
for normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that
the utility contribution is at a minimum. Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume
a maximum contribution from the utility. Calculations shall take into consideration the
parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable as
well as any stand-by generator applications.
The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed utilizing mutually agreed upon facility
operational conditions, and the final report shall describe, when applicable, how these
conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 143 of 145
7. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must
take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or
decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors should be decremented as follows:
Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 5 cycles.
For each piece of ANSI rated equipment with an enclosed main device, two
calculations shall be made. A calculation shall be made for the main cubicle, sides,
or rear; and shall be based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear
the arcing fault. A second calculation shall be made for the front cubicles and shall
be based on the equipment’s main device to clear the arcing fault. For all other
non-ANSI rated equipment, only one calculation shall be required and it shall be
based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear the arcing fault.
8. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as
required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault
calculation.
9. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing the
immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should
utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.
10. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.
A maximum clearing time of 2 seconds will be used based on IEEE 1584-2002 section
B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary
in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the
specific location shall be utilized.
11. Provide the following:
Results of the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall
include device or bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash
protection boundary distances, working distances, personal-protective equipment
classes and AFIE (Arc Flash Incident Energy) levels.
The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall report incident energy values based on
recommended device settings for equipment within the scope of the study.
The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis may include recommendations to reduce AFIE levels
and enhance worker safety.
N. Field Adjustment:
1. Electrical SubContractor shall adjust relay and protective device settings according to the
recommended settings table provided by the coordination study.
2. Electrical SubContractor shall make minor modifications to equipment as required to
accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.
3. Switchgear manufacturer shall notify the design engineer in writing of any required major
equipment modifications.
O. Arc Flash Labels:
1. Electrical SubContractor shall provide a 4.0 in. x 4.0 in. Brady thermal transfer type label of
high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.
2. The labels shall be designed according to the following standards:
UL969 – Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems
ANSI Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels
NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) – Article 110.16
3. The label shall include the following information:
System Voltage
Flash protection boundary
Personal Protective Equipment category
Arc Flash Incident energy value (cal/cm²)
Limited, restricted, and prohibited Approach Boundaries
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 144 of 145
Study report number and issue date
4. Labels shall be printed by a thermal transfer type printer, with no field markings.
5. Arc flash labels shall be provided for equipment as identified in the study and the respective
equipment access areas per the following:
Floor Standing Equipment - Labels shall be provided on the front of each individual
section. Equipment requiring rear and/or side access shall have labels provided on
each individual section access area. Equipment line-ups containing sections with
multiple incident energy and flash protection boundaries shall be labeled as
identified in the Arc Flash Analysis table.
Wall Mounted Equipment – Labels shall be provided on the front cover or a nearby
adjacent surface, depending upon equipment configuration.
General Use Safety labels shall be installed on equipment in coordination with the
Arc Flash labels. The General Use Safety labels shall warn of general electrical
hazards associated with shock, arc flash, and explosions, and instruct workers to
turn off power prior to work.
STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. The electrical subcontractor shall store and install electrical equipment and wiring listed for dry
locations only after the building is watertight.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Separate and recycle materials and material packaging in accordance with Waste Management
Plan and to the maximum extent economically feasible and place in designated areas for
recycling.
B. Set aside and protect materials suitable for reuse and/or remanufacturing.
C. Separate and fold up metal banding; flatten and place along with other metal scrap for recycling
in designated area.
D. Coordinate with Section 017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL.
TRAINING
A. All training shall be scheduled with the user. Training shall be videotaped and a DVD delivered
to the Owner. Refer to each specific system for amount of training required.
Dennis Yarmouth Intermediate Middle School January 19, 2021
Dennis Yarmouth Regional School District 100% Construction Documents
Perkins Eastman DPC, project #71011 Addendum No. 3 February 19, 2021
ELECTRICAL
26 0000 - 145 of 145
SPARE PARTS/ATTIC STOCK:
A. REQUIREMENTS:
1. Provide attic stock of the following quantities and parts for each piece of equipment as
follows:
Equipment/Unit Parts Description Quantity
LED Lights
LED Drivers 2 of each type
Single faced exit signs 3
Double faced exit signs 3
Fire Alarm
Duct smoke detectors of each
type 2
Smoke Detector 3
Pull stations 3
CO Duct Detector 2
Extra set of keys and tools for
access to locked and
tamperproof components
3
END OF SECTION
(THIS PAGE IS BLANK)